User Service Guide

HP 9000 rp3410 and HP 9000 rp3440

Manufacturing Part Number: A7137-96008-ed5 Fifth Edition September 2008 Copyright 2003-2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

Legal Notices
Copyright Notices. Copyright 2003-2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Printed in U.S.A. Intel, Pentium, Intel Inside, Itanium, and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Contents
1. Overview
HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Server Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCI Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Core I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Core I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Board Manageability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Server Manageability Using the Integrity iLO MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, Ports, and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering the Server On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering Off the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 35 35 37 38 44 44 45 45

2. System Specifications
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonoperating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Noise Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical and Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 48 49 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 54

3. Installing the System

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Server Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Detailed Server Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Installation Sequence and Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Unpacking and Inspecting the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Verifying Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Unpacking the Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Checking the Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Returning Damaged Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Unloading the Server with a Lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Installing Additional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Installing Internal Hard Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Installing a DVD Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Installing Additional System Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Installing PCI Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Installing an Additional Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Installing an Additional Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Replacing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP Rack, or Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 HP Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Non-HP Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Pedestal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 AC Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Core I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Applying Standby Power to the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Connecting to the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Console Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Setup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using ARP Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using the RS-232 Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Logging In to the iLO MP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Additional Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Accessing the Host Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Accessing the Host Console With the TUI - CO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Interacting with the iLO MP Using the Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Powering the Server ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Powering On the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Powering Off the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Contents
Booting the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Does Not Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System Does Not Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System Boots with Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent Server Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information to Collect Before You Contact Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 121 121 123 124 124 124 125 125 126 126 126 126 126 127 127 130

4. Booting the Operating System

Supported Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutting Down HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 132 132 133 133 133 134

5. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Front Panel Power Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System Does Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System Does Not Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support Tools Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Monitoring Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iLO MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying and Diagnosing Hardware Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Using LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 136 136 136 137 137 137 137 138 140 140 141 141 141 142 144 145

Contents
6. Removing and Replacing Components
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Service Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of Internal Components and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing a Rack-Mount Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Pedestal-Mount Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing System Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a System Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a System Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported DIMM Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rp3410 Memory Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rp3440 Memory Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Deallocated Memory Ranks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing System Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Dual Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Dual Processor Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the PCI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the PCI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a PCI or Graphics Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a PCI or Graphics Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the PCI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the PCI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the PCI Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing a Removable Media Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Removable Media Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Removable Media Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 148 149 151 151 156 161 161 163 163 164 165 166 166 168 170 171 172 177 177 178 179 179 180 180 181 183 183 190 198 198 198 199 200 200 202 202 203 204 205 205 206 207 208 208

Contents
Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the iLO MP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the iLO MP card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the iLO MP Card Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the LED Status Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the LED Status Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LED Status Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the System Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Resident System Board with a Replacement System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Power Supply Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Hard Drive Disk SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Hard Disk Drive SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 209 210 211 211 211 212 213 213 213 214 214 217 221 222 223 223 226 227 227 230

A. Replacement Parts
Parts Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Customer Self Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

B. Utilities
Boot Console Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 BCH Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 iLO MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

C. Physical and Environmental Specifications Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Contents

Tables
Table 1. Publishing History Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Table 2. HP-UX 11i Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Table 1-1. Server Dimensions and Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Table 1-2. Memory Array Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Table 1-3. Internal Disk and DVD Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Table 1-4. Extended Core I/O Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Table 1-5. PCI I/O Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Table 1-6. PCI I/O Hardware Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Table 1-7. Control Panel LEDs and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Table 1-8. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Table 1-9. DVD Drive LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Table 1-10. Rear Panel Connectors and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Table 1-11. 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Table 1-12. 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Table 1-13. USB Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Table 1-14. SCSI Port Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Table 1-15. iLO MP Card LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Table 1-16. iLO MP Card LAN Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Table 1-17. Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Table 2-1. Minimum and Maximum System Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Table 2-2. Server Dimensions and Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Table 2-3. Power Cords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Table 2-4. System Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Table 2-5. Additional Component Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table 2-6. Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table 2-7. Physical and Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Table 3-1. HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Table 3-2. Server Dimensions and Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Table 3-3. Installation Sequence Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Table 3-4. Setup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Table 3-5. Console Connection Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Table 3-6. LAN Configuration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Table 3-7. ARP Ping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Table 3-8. Power States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Table 3-9. Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and at BCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Table 3-10. Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and OS is Running . . . . . . . . . . 125 Table 3-11. Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Table 3-12. Front Control Panel LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Table 5-1. Power Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Table 5-2. ODE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Table 5-3. System LED States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Table 5-4. 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Table 5-5. iLO MP Card LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Tables
Table 5-6. System Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1. Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2. Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1. Customer Self Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2. Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1. BCH Main Menu, Submenus, and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-2. Boot Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-1. Physical and Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 145 149 150 235 236 242 242 249

10

Figures
Figure 1-1. HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2. HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Front View with Bezel Removed . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3. HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4. HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Pedestal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5. System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6. Memory Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-8. Control Panel LEDs and Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-9. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-10. DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-11. Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-12. 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-13. Dual USB Port Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-14. Single USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-15. SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-16. iLO MP Card LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1. HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2. HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Front View with Bezel Removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3. HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4. HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Pedestal Mount) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5. Release the Rack Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6. Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7. Aligning the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8. Closing the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9. Front Bezel Retaining Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10. Replacing the Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11. Removing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12. Removing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13. Top Cover Alignment Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14. Replacing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15. Replacing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16. Removing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-17. Aligning the Pedestal Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18. Front View of the HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19. Filler Removal from Slot 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20. Disk Drive Installation in Slot 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21. Hard Drive Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22. DVD Drive Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-23. Airflow Guides Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-24. Removing the Memory Airflow Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-25. Removing the Processor Airflow Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-26. Removing Fans 1A and 1B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-27. Open the Release Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 20 21 21 26 28 35 35 37 38 38 39 40 41 41 43 56 56 56 57 64 65 65 66 66 67 68 69 70 70 71 72 73 74 75 75 76 77 79 79 80 81 82

11

Figures
Figure 3-28. Remove the Front Portion of the Processor Airflow Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Figure 3-29. Routing the Turbofan Power Cables through Heatsink Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Figure 3-30. DIMM Slot Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Figure 3-31. Inserting DIMM into Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Figure 3-32. Removing the PCI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Figure 3-33. Removing the PCI Card Cage Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Figure 3-34. Installing a PCI Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Figure 3-35. Removing the Power Supply Filler Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Figure 3-36. Replacing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Figure 3-37. Unlocking the Dual Processor Module Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Figure 3-38. Aligning the Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Figure 3-39. Locking the Dual Processor Module in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Figure 3-40. Slide the Sequencing Retainer Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Figure 3-41. Secure the Captive Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Figure 3-42. Power Module Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Figure 3-43. Aligning the Processor Module Power Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Figure 3-44. Installing the Processor Module Power Pod Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Figure 3-45. Connecting the Power Pod Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Figure 3-46. Routing the Turbofan Power Cables through Heatsink Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Figure 3-47. Replacing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Figure 3-48. LAN Ports on Server Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Figure 3-49. iLO MP Setup Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Figure 3-50. Web Login Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Figure 3-51. Status Summary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Figure 3-52. Control Panel LEDs and Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Figure 5-1. Control Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Figure 5-2. Location of the STBY and BMC LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Figure 6-1. Internal Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Figure 6-2. System Board Connectors and Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Figure 6-3. Release the Rack Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Figure 6-4. Removing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 6-5. Aligning the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 6-6. Closing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 6-7. Front Bezel Retaining Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 6-8. Replacing the Front Bezel on a Rack-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Figure 6-9. Removing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 6-10. Removing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 6-11. Top Cover Alignment Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Figure 6-12. Replacing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Figure 6-13. Replacing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Figure 6-14. Removing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Figure 6-15. Aligning the Pedestal Front Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Figure 6-16. Fan 1A or Fan 1B Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

12

Figures
Figure 6-17. Fan 2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-18. Fan 3 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-19. Releasing the Power Supply Retaining Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-20. Removing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-21. Replacing the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-22. Unlocking the Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-23. Releasing the Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-24. Removing the Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-25. Removing Disk Drive Slot Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-26. Hard Disk Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-27. Airflow Guides Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-28. Removing the Memory Airflow Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-29. Removing the Processor Airflow Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-30. Open the Release Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-31. Remove the Front Portion of the Processor Airflow Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-32. Routing Power Cables through Heatsink Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-33. DIMM Slot Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-34. Inserting DIMM into Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-35. Disconnect Power Pod Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-36. Remove Power Pod Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-37. Disconnect Power Pod from Dual Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-38. Remove Power Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-39. Disconnect the Turbo Fan Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-40. Release Heatsink Captive Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-41. Unlocking the Dual Processor Module Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-42. Removing the Dual Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-43. Dual Processor Module Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-44. Unlocking the Dual Processor Module Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-45. Aligning the Dual Processor Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-46. Locking the Dual Processor Module in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-47. Securing the Captive Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-48. Power Module Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-49. Aligning the Processor Module Power Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-50. Installing the Processor Module Power Pod Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-51. Routing the Turbofan Power Cables through the Heatsink Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-52. Connecting the Power Pod Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-53. Removing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-54. Removing the PCI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-55. Removing the PCI Card Cage Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-56. Installing a PCI Slot Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-57. Installing a PCI Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-58. Removing the PCI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-59. Replacing the PCI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 163 164 165 165 167 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 178 182 184 184 185 186 187 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 193 194 195 196 197 197 199 201 202 204 204 206 207

13

Figures
Figure 6-60. Removable Media Drive Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-61. Removing the iLO MP card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-62. Removing the iLO MP Card Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-63. Removing the LED Status Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-64. Remove Mechanical Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-65. Remove Backplane System Board Mounting Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-66. Remove the System Board Mounting Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-67. Remove the System Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-68. Align the System Board PCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-69. Slide System Board in Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-70. Installing the Rear Panel Mounting Screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-71. Replacing Mechanical Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-72. Reinstalling the Power Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-73. System Product Number, System Serial Number, Key Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-74. Power Cables and Holding Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-75. Remove the Mounting Screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-76. Remove the PSI Interface Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-77. Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-78. Securing the Power Supply Interface Module and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-79. Open the Fan Power Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-80. Disconnect SCSI Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-81. Remove Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-82. Remove the SCSI Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-83. Remove the SCSI Backplane from Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A-1. Parts Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A-2. Pedestal and Rack Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 210 212 213 214 215 215 216 217 218 218 219 219 222 224 225 225 226 226 227 228 228 229 229 232 233

14

About This Document

This document provides information and instructions on how to service and troubleshoot the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. The document printing date and part number indicate the documents current edition. The printing date changes when a new edition is printed. Minor changes may be made at reprint without changing the printing date. The document part number changes when extensive changes are made. Document updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document product changes. To ensure you receive the updated or new editions, subscribe to the appropriate product support service. See your HP sales representative for details. The latest version of this document can be found on the web at: http://www.docs.hp.com.

Intended Audience
This document is intended to provide technical product and support information for authorized service providers, system administrators, and HP support personnel. This document is not a tutorial.

New and Changed Information in This Edition

This following changes are included in this edition: The User Service Guide includes the contents of the Maintenance Guide and the Operations Guide. Server specification and installation information has been included. Physical and environmental specifications table was added.

Publishing History
Table 1 lists the publishing history details for this document.

Table 1
Document Manufacturing Part Number A7137-96008-ed5

Publishing History Details

Operating Systems Supported HP-UX 11i v1 HP-UX 11i v2 HP-UX 11i v3 HP-UX 11i v1 HP-UX 11i v2 HP-UX 11i v3 HP-UX 11i v1 HP-UX 11i v1 Supported Product Versions HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Publication Date September 2008

A7137-96008

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440

April 2007

A7137-96002 A7137-96003 N/A

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440

April 2005 July 2003

15

Document Organization
This guide is divided into the following chapters: Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Overview: Provides views and descriptions of the server. System Specifications: Server details such as system configuration, physical specifications, and requirements. Installing the System: Unpacking, installation, and preparation for booting the operating system. Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System: Provides procedures to boot and shut down the operating system. Troubleshooting: Provides diagnostics and basic troubleshooting methodology. Removing and Replacing Components: Provides instructions and procedures on how to remove and replace server components. Replacement Parts: Provides a list of available customer self-repair parts. Utilities: Provides information on the utilities on the server such as Boot Console Handler (BCH) and the Integrity iLO MP. Physical and Environmental Specifications: Provides temperature and airflow information for minimum, typical, and maximum configurations for the server. Also lists the server and rack weights and dimensions.

Typographic Conventions
This document uses the following conventions.

WARNING

A warning lists requirements that you must meet to avoid personal injury.

CAUTION

A caution provides information required to avoid losing data or avoid losing system functionality.

IMPORTANT Important messages provide essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

NOTE

A note highlights useful information such as restrictions, recommendations, or important details about HP product features.

TIP

Tips provide you with helpful hints for completing a task. A tip is not used to give essential information, but can be used, for example, to provide an alternate method for completing the task that precedes it. The title of a book. On the web and on the Instant Information CD, it can be a hot link to the book itself. The name of a keyboard key or graphical interface item (such as buttons, tabs, and menu items). Return and Enter both refer to the same key.

Book Title
KeyCap

16

Emphasis Bold Bold ComputerOut UserInput Command Option [ ] { } ... |

Text that is emphasized. Text that is strongly emphasized. The defined use of an important word or phrase. Text displayed by the computer. Commands and other text that you type. A command name or qualified command phrase. An available option. The contents are optional in formats and command descriptions. If the contents are a list separated by |, you must select one of the items. The contents are required in formats and command descriptions. If the contents are a list separated by |, you must select one of the items. The preceding element can be repeated an arbitrary number of times. Separates items in a list of choices.

Screen Output Example of computer screen output.

HP-UX Release Name and Release Identifier

Each HP-UX 11i release has an associated release name and release identifier. The uname (1) command with the -r option returns the release identifier. Table 2 shows the releases available for HP-UX 11i.

Table 2

HP-UX 11i Releases

Release Name HP-UX 11i v1.5 HP-UX 11i v1.6 HP-UX 11i v2 HP-UX 11i v3 Supported Processor Architecture Intel Itanium Intel Itanium Intel Itanium Intel Itanium

Release Identifier B.11.20 B.11.22 B.11.23 B.11.31

Related Documents
You can find other information on HP server hardware management and diagnostic support tools in the following publications. Website for HP Technical Documentation: http://docs.hp.com Server Hardware Information: http://docs.hp.com/hpux/hw/ Diagnostics and Event Monitoring: Hardware Support Tools Complete information about HPs hardware support tools, including online and offline diagnostics and event monitoring tools, is available at: http://docs.hp.com/hpux/diag/

17

This site has manuals, tutorials, FAQs, and other reference material. Web Site for HP Technical Support: http://us-support2.external.hp.com/ Books about HP-UX Published by Prentice Hall The http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/ website lists the HP books that Prentice Hall currently publishes, including the following: HP-UX 11i System Administration Handbook http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130600814.html HP-UX Virtual Partitions http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130352128.html

HP Books are available worldwide through bookstores, online booksellers, and office and computer stores.

HP Encourages Your Comments

HP encourages your comments concerning this document. We are truly committed to providing documentation that meets your needs. Send comments to: netinfo_feedback@cup.hp.com Include title, manufacturing part number, and any comments, errors found, or suggestions for improvement you have concerning this document. Also, please include what we did right so we can incorporate it into other documents.

18

1 Overview
The HP 9000 rp3410 server is a 1P/1C, 1P/2C, rack- or pedestal-mount server. Similarly, the HP 9000 rp3440 server is a 1P/1C, 1P/2C, 2P/2C, or 2P/4C rack- or pedestal-mount server. Both of these servers are based on the PA-RISC processor family architecture. The server accommodates up to 12 DIMMs and internal peripherals including disks and DVD. Its high-availability features include hot-swappable power supplies and hot-pluggable disk drives. The supported operating system is HP-UX 11i v1 (and newer HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems). This chapter addresses the following topics: HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Views on page 20 Detailed Server Description on page 22 Controls, Ports, and LEDs on page 35 Powering the Server On and Off on page 44

Chapter 1

19

Overview HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Views

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Views

Figure 1-2, Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3, and Figure 1-4 show the front, rear, and pedestal views of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Figure 1-1

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Front View

Figure 1-2

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Front View with Bezel Removed

20

Chapter 1

Overview HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Views

Figure 1-3

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Rear View

Figure 1-4

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Servers - Pedestal Mount

Chapter 1

21

Overview Detailed Server Description

Detailed Server Description

This section provides information on the features that comprise the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Processor
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: 800 MHz/1.5 GB cache (HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers). 1 GHz/1.5 GB cache (HP 9000 rp3440 server only). Both processors are available with 32 MB or 64 MB L2 cache. HP 9000 rp3410 servers can be 1P/1C and 1P/2C. HP 9000 rp3440 servers can be 1P/1C and 1P/2C, and 2P/2C.

Memory
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: 12 memory DIMM slots. Minimum memory size is as follows: 512 MB (2 x 256 MB DIMMs in a HP 9000 rp3410, model A7136A server). 1 GB (4 x 256 MB DIMMs in a HP9000 rp3410 model A7136B server, or in a HP 9000 rp3440 server). Maximum memory size is as follows: 6 GB (HP 9000 rp3410 server), 24 GB (HP 9000 rp3440 server with 2 GB DIMMs installed in all 12 slots). or 32 GB (HP 9000 rp3440 server with 4 GB DIMMs installed in the first eight slots) For the HP 9000 rp3410 server, DIMMs are as follows: 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB standard 184 pins 2.5V DDR266, CL2, registered, ECC For the HP 9000 rp3440 server, DIMMs are as follows: 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB standard 184 pins 2.5V DDR266, CL2, registered, ECC Only one supported configuration for 4 GB DIMMs; 2 quads (8 DIMMs); and no other DIMMs can be installed. DIMMs loaded by quads enable interleaved mode and chip spare. Memory is loaded across both memory busses (two DIMMs on each bus) to ensure maximum bandwidth and performance. 133 MHz memory bus frequency, 266 MTransfers/s data, 8.5 GB/s peak data bandwidth.

22

Chapter 1

Overview Detailed Server Description Total memory bandwidth is 8.5 GB/s, split across two 4.25 GB/s memory buses. Open page memory latency is 80 nanoseconds.

PCI Riser
Two (HP 9000 rp3410 server) or four (HP 9000 rp3440 server) independent PCI-X 133 MHz 64-bit 3.3V 15W slots. No 5V card and hot-pluggable support.

Internal Core I/O

The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: Dual-channel SCSI U160 interface, two internal 68-pin connectors, one 68-pin external connector. SCSI backplane configured either as two channels with 2+1 drives. A SAF-TE accessory (currently not available) is required to configure the SCSI backplane as one channel with three drives. Three internal SCSI drive connectors are of the 80-pin type and provide drive electrical hot-pluggable capability. SCSI backplane is designed to support a SCSI management piggy board accessory that provides a SCSI management SAF-TE chip and shunts the backplane's channels A and B to provide three disks on channel A and leave only the external connector on channel B. One internal IDE connector for a slim-line optical device (CD and DVD). No floppy connector.

External Core I/O

The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: One SCSI U160 68-pin connector. One 10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet LAN connectors for copper cable. Four USB 2.0 ports. Three DB-9 ports (console, UPS, and modem) through a 3-connector M cable.

Power Supply Unit

The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: 650W output power. The power supply is split in a front end block (the actual power supply case) that converts the line voltage into a high dc voltage and back end voltage regulation modules (on the motherboard) that step down the front end dc voltage to the required voltages. Redundant and hot-pluggable power supplies (front end block only).

System Board Manageability

The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: Baseboard Management Controller (BMC). Temperature monitoring and fans regulation by BMC.

Chapter 1

23

Overview Detailed Server Description BMC manageability console shared with system console/general purpose serial port. IPMI protocol for communication between BMC/system/iLO MP. Hardware diagnostics by BMC displayed on the front status panel. Locator front/rear LEDs. Field replacement units monitoring by BMC.

Enhanced Server Manageability Using the Integrity iLO MP

The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: LAN telnet console. Web GUI. Serial port for local console. Serial port for modem console. Duplication of console screen content across all consoles.

Hard Disk Drives

Three half-height hard disk drives (1-inch height).

Internal RAID
The following is supported on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers: The A9890A and A9891A RAID cards are supported to provide RAID for the embedded drives. The A9827A cabling kit is required for internal RAID. See the HP 9000 rp3410 and HP 9000 rp3440 Upgrade Guide for complete RAID installation instructions.

Firmware
Firmware consists of many individually linked binary images that are bound together by a single framework at run time. Internally, the firmware employs a software database called a device tree to represent the structure of the hardware platform and to provide a means of associating software elements with hardware functionality. The firmware incorporates the Boot Console Handler (BCH) which provides an interface between the operating system and the platform firmware. The firmware supports the HP-UX 11i version 1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems) operating system through the HP 9000 processor family standards and extensions, and has no operating system-specific functionality included. The operating system is presented with the same interface to system firmware, and all features are available to the operating system. Event IDs for Errors and Events The server firmware generates event IDs similar to chassis codes for errors, events, and forward progress to the Integrity Integrated Light-Out Management Processor (iLO MP) through common shared memory. The integrity iLO MP interprets and stores event IDs. Reviewing these events helps you diagnose and troubleshoot problems with the server.

24

Chapter 1

Overview Detailed Server Description

Dimensions and Values

Table 1-1 lists the dimensions and their values of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table 1-1

Server Dimensions and Values

Dimension Values 26.8 in (67.9 cm) max. x 19.0 in (48.3 cm) x 3.4 in (8.6 cm) 26.6 in (67.5 cm) x 11.6 in (29.5 cm) x 19.5 in (49.4 cm) Minimum: 38.6 lbs (17.5 kg) Maximum: 49.0 lbs (22.2 kg) Minimum: 49.4 lbs (22.4 kg) Maximum: 56.3 lbs (25.5 kg) 0.2 m2 (2.1 sq. ft.) 2U

Rack dimensions (depth x width x height) Pedestal dimensions (depth x width x height) Rack weight Pedestal weight Pedestal footprint Rack units

System Board
This section provides a block diagram of the system board and descriptions of key components (integrated circuits) on the board.

Chapter 1

25

Overview Detailed Server Description Figure 1-5 shows the system block diagram.

Figure 1-5

System Block Diagram

PA-RISC Processor

PA-RISC Processor ASIC Bus Interface

*
ASIC Bus Interface ASIC Bus Interface ASIC Bus Interface ASIC Bus Interface ASIC Bus Interface ASIC Bus Interface

ASIC Bus Interface

ASIC Bus Interface

*Factory use only

System Board Components The following describes the main components of the system board: Dual PA-RISC processors: One or two processors enabled in HP 9000 rp3410 server One, two, or four processors enabled in HP 9000 rp3440 server ZX1 I/O and memory controller ZX1 PCI bus controller Processor dependent hardware controller Field processor gate array controller BMC SCSI controller

26

Chapter 1

Overview Detailed Server Description IDE controller USB controller 10/100/1000 LAN

PA RISC Processor The system board consists of two Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) processor sockets, the Core Electronic Complex (CEC), and circuits for clock and power generation and distribution, boundary Scan, In-target Probe (ITP), and debug. The Front Side Bus (FSB) is the IA64 processor bus based on bus protocol from Intel. This enables processor customer self-repair (CSR) parts to be dropped in, provided that electrical and mechanical compatibility and support circuitry exist. A processor CSR consists of a dual processor module with heatsink assembly. One end of the FSB is terminated with an I/O ASIC. The other end of the bus is terminated with a CSR. An additional CSR can be loaded in the middle. For the system to function properly, the processor farthest away from the I/O ASIC must be loaded at all times to electrically terminate the FSB. Each processor module plugs directly into and is powered by its own 12V to 1.2V power-pod. Other power for the system board comes from multiple on-board dc/dc converters. Each processor module is attached to the board through a ZIF socket and the entire CSR secured down by a heatsink bolster plate. Processor Bus The processor bus (Front Side Bus [FSB]) in this product runs at 200 MHz. Data on the FSB are transferred at a double data rate, which enables a peak FSB bandwidth of 6.4 Gb/sec. ZX1 I/O and Memory Controller HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers support the following features of the ZX1 I/O and memory controller chip: 3.3 GB/s peak IO bandwidth. Provides eight communication paths. Peak memory bandwidth of 8.5 GBs. Two memory cells, 144 data bits each.

Memory The memory subsystem provides two memory cells, each of which is 144 data bits wide. Each cell has six DIMM slots, which means a total of 12 DIMM slots are available. The memory bus clock speed is 133 MHz, and the data transfer rate is 266Mtransfers/second as data is clocked on both edges of the clock. The peak data bandwidth for this memory subsystem design is 8.5 GB/s. DIMMs must be loaded in quads with qualified modules, with the exception of 256 MB DIMMs which is loaded in pairs. Memory is protected by data error correction code (ECC), and the hardware implementation supports the chip-spare feature. The minimum amount of memory that you can install is 512 MB (2x256 MB modules in a HP 9000 rp3410 model A7136A server), and 1 GB (4x256 MB modules in other HP 9000 rp34x0 servers). The maximum amount of memory that you can install is limited to 24 GB (12 x 2 GB modules) or 32 GB (8 x 4 GB modules) in a HP 9000 rp3440 server. This design does not support any non industry-standard DDR DIMMs. Only qualified DIMMs are supported.

Chapter 1

27

Overview Detailed Server Description Figure 1-6 shows the memory block diagram.

Figure 1-6

Memory Block Diagram

Memory Controller

Memory Architecture The I/O ASIC memory interface supports two DDR cells, each of which is 144 data bits wide. The memory subsystem physical design uses a comb-filter termination scheme for both the data and address/control buses. This part of the topology is similar to other DDR designs in the computer industry. Clocks are distributed directly from the I/O ASIC; each clock pair drives two DIMMs. Memory data is protected by ECC. Eight ECC bits per DIMM protect 64 bits of data. The use of ECC enables correction of single-bit errors, and detection of multi-bit errors. Only DIMMs with ECC are qualified or supported. DIMMs The memory subsystem only supports DDR SDRAM (Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) technology utilizing industry-standard PC-1600 type DDR SDRAM DIMMs, 1.2" tall. This is currently being used by high-volume products. The DIMMs use a 184-pin JEDEC standard connector. DIMMs are loaded in groups of four, known as a rank or quad (except for 256 MB DIMMs, which is loaded in pairs). All four DIMMs in a rank or quad must be the same size. The following information summarizes the memory solutions.

28

Chapter 1

Overview Detailed Server Description Memory Array Capacities

Table 1-2 lists the memory array capacities for the server.

Table 1-2
Minimum and Maximum Memory Size
0.5 GB / 3 GB 2 GB / 6 GB 4 GB / 12 GB 8 GB / 24 GB 16 GB / 32 GB

Memory Array Capacities

Single DIMM Size DDR SDRAM Count, Type and Technology

256 MB DIMM 512 MB DIMM 1024 MB DIMM 2048 MB DIMM 4096 MB DIMM

18 x 32 MB x 4 DDR SDRAMs (128 MB) 36 x 32 MB x 4 DDR SDRAMs (128 MB) 36 x 64 MB x 4 DDR SDRAMs (256 MB) 36 x 128 MB x 4 DDR SDRAMs (512 MB) 36 x 256 MB x 4 DDR SDRAMs (1024 MB)

Chip Spare Functionality Chip spare enables an entire DDR SDRAM chip on a DIMM to be bypassed in the event that a multi-bit error is detected on the DDR SDRAM. In order to use the chip spare functionality on the server, only DIMMs built with 4 DDR SDRAM parts are used, and these DIMMs must be loaded in quads. The memory subsystem design supports the I/O ASIC chips spare functionality. Chip spare enables an entire SDRAM chip on a DIMM to be bypassed/replaced in the event that a multi-bit error is detected on that SDRAM. In order to use the chip spare functionality, only DIMMs built with x4 SDRAM parts are used, and these DIMMs must be loaded in quads (2 DIMMs per memory cell, loaded in the same location in each memory cell). Each DIMM within a quad must be identical to all the other DIMMs in the quad. Using the DIMM loading order figure from above, chip spare is achieved if four identical DIMMs are loaded in the slots labeled 1st and 2nd. If more DIMMs are added, they must be loaded in quads in order to maintain the chip spare functionality. If more DIMMs are added to the example case, four identical DIMMs (identical to each other, but can be different from the original quad that was loaded) must be loaded in the slots labeled 3rd and 4th. Maximum memory capability of the HP 9000 rp3440 server is 24 GB or 32 GB. If 4 GB DIMMs are used, install eight DIMMs in the first eight slots. The remaining slots (9-12) must remain empty when 4 GB DIMMs are used. Serial Presence Detect Each DIMM contains an I2C EEPROM whose content describes the modules characteristics: speed, technology, revision, vendor, etc. This feature is called serial presence detect (SPD). Firmware typically uses this information to detect unmatched pairs of DIMMs, and configure certain memory subsystem parameters. The SPD information for DIMMs loaded in the system are also accessible to the BMC through the I2C bus. I/O Bus Interface The I/O bus interface has these features: Provides industry standard PCI 33 MHz and 66 MHz, PCI-X 66 MHz to 133 MHz, 32 or 64 data bit support. Uses 3.3V PCI only, and it does not support 5V PCI. Optimizes for DMA performance.

Chapter 1

29

Overview Detailed Server Description Supports 3.3V or universal-keyed PCI cards. 5V-keyed PCI cards are not supported.

Processor Dependent Hardware (PDH) Controller The Processor Dependent Hardware (PDH) controller provides the following features. 16-bit PDH bus with reserved address space for the following: Flash memory Nonvolatile memory Scratch RAM Real time clock UARTs External registers Firmware read/writable registers Two general purpose 32-bit registers Semaphore registers Monarch selection registers Test and reset register Reset and INIT generation

Field Programmable Gate Array The Field Programmable Gate array (FPGA) provides ACPI and LPC support for the PDH bus and provides these features: ACPI 2.0 interface. LPC bus interface to support BMC. Decoding logic for PDH devices.

BMC The BMC supports the industry-standard Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) specification. This specification describes the management features that have been built into the system board. These features include: diagnostics (both local and remote), console support, configuration management, hardware management and troubleshooting. The BMC provides the following: Compliance with IPMI 1.0. Tachometer inputs for fan speed monitoring. Pulse width modulator outputs for fan speed control. Push-button inputs for front panel buttons and switches. One serial port, multiplexed with the system console port. Remote access and intelligent chassis management bus (ICMB) support. Three I2C master/slave ports (one of the ports is used for intelligent platform management bus (IPMB).

30

Chapter 1

Overview Detailed Server Description Low Pin Count (LPC) bus provides access to three Keyboard Controller Style (KCS) and one-Block Transfer (BT) interface. 32-bit ARM7 RISC processor. 160-pin Low Profile Flat Pack (LQFP) package. Firmware is provided for the following interfaces: IPMI IPMB SCSI Controller The SCSI controller is a LSI Logic 53C1030 chip. This chip is fully compliant with the SCSI Peripheral Interface-4 Specification (SPI-4). It has two independent SCSI channels supporting devices at speeds up to 320 MB/sec each. The 53C1030 adheres to the PCI-X addendum, to the PCI Local Specification, and is hard-wired to PCI ID 1 which corresponds to bit 17 of the PCI AD bus. IDE Interface The IDE controller (PCI649) supports the ATAPI zero (0) to five (5) modes (from 16 to 100 MB/s). The usable speed on this system is limited to 16 MHz (ATA-33 mode, 33 MB/s) because the slimline CD/DVD devices do not support the ATA-66 and 100 modes. The primary IDE channel is the only channel that is implemented. The IDE cable provides only one drive connector, of the master type, for the optical storage peripheral. 1 GB System LAN The 1 GB System LAN port provides: Main system LAN. 10/100/1000 MB capable.

USB Connectors The USB connectors provide: High speed 480 MB/sec. capable. Full speed 12 MB/sec. and low speed 1.5 MB/sec. Support for USB keyboard and mouse. HP-UX supports HP USB keyboard and mouse.

Chapter 1

31

Overview Detailed Server Description Disk and I/O Path Logging Some failures result in I/O path logging. These paths help to indicate the source of the error and can be included in the error message or logged into console or event logs. Table 1-3 describes the disk drive and DVD paths for the server.

Table 1-3
Slot Disk slot 0 Disk slot 1 Disk slot 2 DVD slot

Internal Disk and DVD Paths

Function Associated with Path Ultra 3 SCSI I/O for bottom removable disk Ultra 3 SCSI I/O for middle removable disk Ultra 3 SCSI I/O for top removable disk IDE I/O for DVD Location Bottom disk slot Middle disk slot Top disk slot DVD slot ACPI Path 0/1/1/0.0.0 0/1/1/0.1.0 0/1/1/1.2.0 0/0/2/0.0.0

Table 1-4 describes the extended core I/O paths for the server.

Table 1-4
Slot Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O Core I/O

Extended Core I/O Paths

Function Associated with Path USB port USB port USB port USB port USB port IDE controller LAN 100 port Ultra 3 SCSI Channel A Ultra 3 SCSI Channel B Ultra 3 SCSI I/O external SCSI Location Rear panel (with mouse symbol) 0/0/1/0 Rear panel (with keyboard symbol) Rear panel (bottom/ white connector) Internal System board Rear panel (with LAN 10/100 label) System board System board Rear panel (with SCSI LVD/SE label) Rear panel (with LAN GV label) ACPI Path 0/0/1/0 Rear panel (top/ white connector) 0/0/1/1 0/0/1/1 0/0/1/2 0/0/2/0 0/0/3/0 0/1/1/0 0/1/1/1 0/1/1/1.x.y

Core I/O

LAN 1000 port

0/1/2/0

32

Chapter 1

Overview Detailed Server Description

Table 1-4
Slot Console port

Extended Core I/O Paths (Continued)

Function Associated with Path Interface with external console (ECI) Location Rear panel (accessible thru W cable) Rear panel (accessible thru W cable) Rear panel (accessible thru W cable) Rear panel (with VGA label) Rear panel (with Serial A label) Rear panel (with Serial B label) ACPI Path 0/7/1/1

Remote port

Interface with UPS (ECI)

0/7/1/0

UPS port

Interface with UPS

N/A

ECI (VGA port) N/A N/A

Not used (disabled) Baseboard console port (CLI) Baseboard serial port

0/7/2/0 Factory use only Factory use only

Table 1-5 describes the PCI I/O paths for the server.

Table 1-5
Slot Slot 1 Slot 2

PCI I/O Paths

Function Associated with Path 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card Location Top connector/slot in PCI card cage Second connector/slot in PCI card cage Third connector/slot in PCI card cage Bottom connector of PCI card cage ACPI Path 0/4/1/0 0/3/1/0

Slot 3 Slot 4

64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card (active rp3440 only) 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card (active rp3440 only)

0/2/1/0 0/6/1/0

Table 1-6 describes the PCI I/O hardware paths for the server

Table 1-6

PCI I/O Hardware Paths

PCI Card Functionality MAPPER Path 0/0/1/0 0/0/1/0 HP-UX Path 0/0/1/0 0/0/1/0

USB Port USB Port

Chapter 1

33

Overview Detailed Server Description

Table 1-6

PCI I/O Hardware Paths (Continued)

PCI Card Functionality MAPPER Path 0/0/1/1 0/0/1/1 0/0/2/0 0/0/2/0.0.0 0/1/1/0.0.0 0/1/1/0.1.0 0/1/1/1.2.0 0/1/1/0 0/1/1/1 0/1/1/1.x.y 0/1/2/0 0/4/1/0 0/3/1/0 0/2/1/0 0/6/1/0 0/7/1/0 0/7/1/1 HP-UX Path 0/0/1/1 0/0/1/1 0/0/2/0 0/0/2/0.0.0 0/1/1/0.0.0 0/1/1/0.1.0 0/1/1/1.2.0 0/1/1/0 0/1/1/1 0/1/1/1.x.y 0/1/2/0 0/4/1/0 0/3/1/0 0/2/1/0 0/6/1/0 0/7/1/0 0/7/1/1

USB Port USB Port IDE Controller DVD Drive Internal SCSI - Slot 0 Internal SCSI - Slot 1 Internal SCSI - Slot 2 Channel A Ultra 3 SCSI Channel B Ultra 3 SCSI External, Ultra 3 SCSI LVD/SE Core LAN Gb PCI Slot 1 PCI Slot 2 PCI Slot 3 PCI Slot 4 UPS, Communications Controller Local/Remote Serial Controller

34

Chapter 1

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs

Controls, Ports, and LEDs

This section describes the controls, ports, and indicators found on the front and rear panel locations of the HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server. The servers are designed to be rack- or pedestal-mounted.

Control Panel
The control panel of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers provide the controls and indicators commonly used for operation. Figure 1-7 shows the front panel details.

Figure 1-7

Front View
Control Panel DVD Drive

Drive 3 Drive 2 Drive 1 System Product Label (Pulls-Out)

Figure 1-8 shows the control panel LEDs and buttons.

Figure 1-8

Control Panel LEDs and Buttons

Locator Button and LED Diagnostics LEDs (Disabled) LAN LED System LED Power Button Power On/Off LED

LAN System

Chapter 1

35

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs

Table 1-7 provides control panel and LED information.

Table 1-7
Name Power on/off LED Power Button

Control Panel LEDs and Switches

Function The green on/off LED is illuminated when the power is on. Controls the power supply (turns system power on or off) if power is available to the power supply. (Controls both power supplies if two are installed). If power is off but power is available to the power supplies, pressing the power button does the following: Momentarily (less than one second) turns on the power supplies and applies power to server circuits. More than two or three seconds, then released, has no effect.

If power is on and the system is at initial system loader, pressing the power button: Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect. More than one second, but less than five secondsdo not use. This initiates e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the server. More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.

If power is on and the system is at BCH, pressing the power button does the following: Momentarily (less than one second) causes a immediate and hard power down. More than one second, but less than five secondsdo not use. This initiates e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the server. More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.

If power is on but the OS has been shut down, pressing the power button: Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect. More than one second, but less than five secondsdo not use. This initiates e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers. More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.

If the OS is running, pressing the power button does the following: System LED Momentarily (less than one second) has no effect. More than one second, but less than five secondsdo not use. This initiates e-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers. More than five seconds then released causes an immediate hard power off.

The System LED provides information about the system status. When operation is normal, the LED is green. When there is a system warning, the LED is flashing yellow. When there is a system fault, the LED is flashing red. The LAN LED provides status information about the LAN interface. When the LAN LED is flashing, there is activity on the LAN.

LAN LED

36

Chapter 1

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs

Table 1-7
Name Locator button and LED

Control Panel LEDs and Switches (Continued)

Function The locator button and LED are used to help locate this server within a rack of servers. When the button is engaged, the blue LED illuminates and an additional blue LED on the rear panel of the server illuminates. You can remotely activate this function.

Additional Controls and Indicators

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers can have up to three low-voltage differential (LVD), 3.5-inch form factor hot-pluggable disk drives installed. These disk drives have LEDs that provide status and activity information. Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive Indicators The disk drives have two LEDs per drive, as follows: Status LED: Not used on the HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server. Activity LED: Flashing green and indicates disk drive activity. This LED is directly controlled by the disk drive and turns on when a drive is accessed.

Figure 1-9 shows the hot-pluggable disk drive LED indicators.

Figure 1-9

Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Indicators

Status LED (Not Used) Activity LED

Table 1-8 lists the hot-pluggable disk drive LED definitions.

Table 1-8
LED Status LED Activity LED

Hot-Pluggable Disk Drive LED Definitions

State None Flashing green Not used. Reading and scanning hard drive Description

Optional Removable Media Drive HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers are delivered without a removable media drive. You can add either a DVD or CD-RW/DVD drive. Each of these optional devices has one activity LED.

Chapter 1

37

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs Figure 1-10 shows the DVD drive details.

Figure 1-10

DVD Drive

DVD

Activity LED

Eject Button

Emergency Eject

Table 1-9 lists the DVD drive LED definitions.

Table 1-9
LED Activity LED

DVD Drive LED Definitions

State Flashing green Drive is active Description

Rear Panel
The rear panel of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers includes communication ports, I/O ports, ac power connector, and the locator LED/button. Additional LEDs located on the rear panel of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers signal the operational status of: 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN iLO MP card LAN

Figure 1-11 shows the rear panel ports and LEDs.

Figure 1-11

Rear View
System Lock Console/Remote/UPS Console/Serial Port A (Factory Use Only) PCI Slot 1 PCI Slot 2 PCI Slot 3 (rp3440 Only)

VGA Port-disabled DO NOT USE ac Power Receptacle

LVD/SE SCSI 10/100 iLO MP LAN 10/100/1000 LAN

USB Ports TOC Button

Serial Port B (Factory Use Only)

PCI Slot 4 (rp3440 Only)

Locator Button and LED

38

Chapter 1

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs Table 1-10 lists the rear-panel connectors and switches.

Table 1-10
Connector or Switch ac power LVD/SE SCSI (1 GB) 10/100/1000 LAN Serial A (console) and Serial B USB TOC Locator button and LED

Rear Panel Connectors and Switches

Function Primary power connection for the server. 68-pin, low-voltage differential, single-ended U160 SCSI. This connector provides external SCSI connection on SCSI Channel B. 10/100/1000 base-T Ethernet LAN connector. 9-pin male serial connectorsfactory use only. Four universal serial bus (USB 2.0) connectors. Transfer of control button. Halts all system processing and I/O activity and restarts system. The locator button and LED are used to help locate a server within a rack of servers. When the button is engaged, the blue LED illuminates and an additional blue LED on the front panel of the server illuminates. You can remotely activate this function. 15-pin female video connector. DISABLEDDO NOT USE. To enable video capability you must obtain the supported A6150 video PCI card. See enclosed ReadMe, A6150-90001. 25-pin female serial data bus connector for the iLO MP card. 10 Mb/100 Mb LAN connector for the iLO MP.

Video (not used)

Console/remote/UPS 10/100 iLO MP LAN

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector Figure 1-12 shows the rear panel 10/100/1000 base-T Ethernet LAN connector and the status and activity LEDs.

Figure 1-12

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector LEDs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1000BT 100BT 10BT Activity

Chapter 1

39

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs

Table 1-11 lists the 10/100/1000 base-T Ethernet LAN connector LED descriptions.

Table 1-11
LED 1000BT 100BT 10BT Activity

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector LEDs

Description Blinking greenthe 1000 MHz with Ethernet protocol and twisted-pair wiring is enabled, offno link. Blinking greenthe 100 MHz with Ethernet protocol and twisted-pair wiring is enabled, offno link. Blinking greenthe 10 MHz with Ethernet protocol and twisted-pair wiring is enabled, offno link. Blinking greenLAN activity.

Table 1-12 lists the 10/100/1000 base-T Ethernet LAN connector pinouts.

Table 1-12
Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 USB Ports

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector Pinouts

Signal Description TXP TXN RXP Not used Not used RXN Not used Not used

Figure 1-13 shows the dual USB port connector.

Figure 1-13

Dual USB Port Connector

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

40

Chapter 1

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs Figure 1-14 shows the single USB port.

Figure 1-14

Single USB Port

1 2 3 4

Table 1-13 lists the USB pinouts.

Table 1-13
Pin Number 1 2 3 4

USB Pinouts
Signal Description +5 VDC MR PR Ground

SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin A single, Ultra 3, 68 pin SCSI connector is located at the rear panel of the server. The external connector supports SCSI channel B. Figure 1-15 shows the SCSI port, Ultra 3, 68-pin.

Figure 1-15

SCSI Port, Ultra 3, 68-Pin

35

68

34

Table 1-14 lists the SCSI port pinouts.

Table 1-14
Pin Number 1 2

SCSI Port Pinouts

Signal Description S1 (+DB 12) S2 (+DB 13) Pin Number 35 36 Signal Description S35 (DB 12) S36 (DB 13)

Chapter 1

41

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs

Table 1-14
Pin Number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SCSI Port Pinouts (Continued)

Signal Description S3 (+DB 14) S4 (+DB 15) S5 (+DB P1) S6 (+DB 0) S7 (+DB 1) S8 (+DB 2) S9 (+DB 3) S10 (+DB 4) S11 (+DB 5) S12 (+DB 6) S13 (+DB 7) S14 (+DB P) S15 S16 (DIFFSENS) S17 (TERMPWR) S18 (TERMPWR) S19 (RESERVED) S20 S21 (+ATN) S22 S23 (+BSY) S24 (+ACK) S25 (+RST) S26 (+MSG) S27 (+SEL) S28 (+C/D) S29 (+REQ) S30 (+I/O) S31 (+DB 8) Pin Number 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 Signal Description S37 (DB 14) S38 (DB 15) S39 (DB P1) S40 (DB 0) S41 (DB 1) S42 (DB 2) S43 (DB 3) S44 (DB 4) S45 (DB 5) S46 (DB 6) S47 (DB 7) S48 (DB P) S49 S50 S51 (TERMPWR) S52 (TERMPWR) S53 (RESERVED) S54 S55 (ATN) S56 S57 (BSY) S58 (ACK) S59 (RST) S60 (MSG) S61 (SEL) S62 (C/D) S63 (REQ) S64 (I/O) S65 (DB 8)

42

Chapter 1

Overview Controls, Ports, and LEDs

Table 1-14
Pin Number 32 33 34

SCSI Port Pinouts (Continued)

Signal Description S32 (+DB 9) S33 (+DB 10) S34 (+DB 11) Pin Number 66 67 68 Signal Description S66 (DB 9) S67 (DB 10) S68 (DB 11)

iLO MP Card LAN LEDs The iLO MP card LAN uses an RJ-45 type connector. This connector has four LEDs that signal status and activity. Figure 1-16 shows the iLO MP card LAN LEDs.

Figure 1-16

iLO MP Card LAN LEDs

Self-test 10BT 100BT Standby Power

Table 1-15 lists the iLO MP card LAN LEDs.

Table 1-15
LED Self-test 10BT

iLO MP Card LAN LEDs

Color Yellow Green Description iLO MP is running self-test or error is detected 10BT link established, blinking green 10BT link activity, off no link 100BT link established, blinking green 100BT link activity, off no link Standby power on, off standby power off

100BT

Green

Standby power

Green

Chapter 1

43

Overview Powering the Server On and Off

Table 1-16 lists the iLO MP card LAN connector pinouts.

Table 1-16
Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

iLO MP Card LAN Connector Pinouts

Signal Description TXP TXN RXP Not used Not used RXN Not used Not used

Powering the Server On and Off

This section provides information on how to power off and power on the server.

Power States
The server has three power states: Standby power Full power Off

Plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the server to achieve the standby power state; the front panel power button is not turned on. Full power occurs when the power cord is plugged into the appropriate receptacle, and either the power is activated through the iLO MP PC command, or the power button is activated. In the off state, the power cords are not plugged in. Table 1-17 lists the server power states.

Table 1-17

Power States
Power Cable Plugged Into Receptacle? Yes Yes No Power Activated through the iLO MP PC Command; or Front Panel Power Button Activated? No Yes No Standby dc Voltage Applied? Yes Yes No dc Voltage Applied? No Yes No

Power States

Standby power Full power Off

44

Chapter 1

Overview Powering the Server On and Off

NOTE

If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state.

Powering On the Server

Power on the server to full power using the following methods if the server is in the standby power state: iLO MP PC command Power button

Powering On the Server Using the iLO MP

NOTE

If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state.

To power on the server using the iLO MP, follow these steps: Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server. Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu. Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode. Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command. Step 5. Enter ON to power on the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action. Step 6. Start the operating system. Powering On the Server Manually

NOTE

If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state.

To manually power on the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server. Step 2. Press the power button to start the server. Step 3. Start the operating system.

Powering Off the Server

Power off the server using the following methods if the server is in the standby or full power state: iLO MP PC command Power button

Powering Off the Server Using the iLO MP To power off the server using the iLO MP, follow these steps:

Chapter 1

45

Overview Powering the Server On and Off Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system. Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu. Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode. Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command. Step 5. Enter OFF to power off the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action.

IMPORTANT The main dc voltage is now removed from the system; however, ac voltage for standby power is still present in the server. Step 6. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server. Powering Off the Server Manually To manually power off the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system. Step 2. Press the power button to power off the server.

IMPORTANT The main dc voltage is now removed from the system; however, ac voltage for standby power is still present in the server. Step 3. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.

46

Chapter 1

2 System Specifications
This chapter provides information on the basic system configuration, physical specifications, and requirements for the HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server. This chapter addresses the following topics: System Configuration on page 47 Dimensions and Values on page 48 Grounding on page 49 Electrical Specifications on page 49 Environmental Specifications on page 51 Physical and Environmental Specifications on page 54

System Configuration
Table 2-1 lists the minimum and maximum configuration options for the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table 2-1
Component Microprocessors

Minimum and Maximum System Configurations

rp3410 One dual processor module with one or two PA RISC processors enabled. Each processor is 800 MHz/1.5 MB cache with 32 MB or 64 MB L2 cache. Supports up to 12 double data rate (DDR) registered ECC memory, in PC2100 DIMMs. Maximum memory capacity is 6 GB. Supported DDR DIMM sizes: 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB. Three 36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI hot-plug disks or Three 73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI hot-plug disks or Three 146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI hot-plug disks. Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual-channel controller; 80 MB/s transfer rate with one internal 68-pin connector and one external 68-pin connector. PCI GB, fast Ethernet controller. rp3440 One or two dual processor modules each containing two PA RISC processors. Each processor is 800 MHz/1.5 MB cache or 1 GHz/1.5 MB with 32 MB or 64 MB L2 cache. Supports up to 12 double data rate (DDR) registered ECC Memory, in PC2100 DIMMs. Maximum memory capacity is 32 GB if 4 GB DIMMs are used. Supported DDR DIMM sizes: 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB. Three 36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI hot-plug disks or Three 73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI hot-plug disks or Three 146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI hot-plug disks. Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual-channel controller; 80 MB/s transfer rate with one internal 68-pin connector and one external 68-pin connector. PCI GB, fast Ethernet controller.

Memory

HDDs

SCSI

LAN

Chapter 2

47

System Specifications Dimensions and Values

Table 2-1
Component PCI slots Core I/O DVD External storage Power supply

Minimum and Maximum System Configurations (Continued)

rp3410 Two 64-bit PCI-X slots, 133 MHz, 3.3V slots. One serial port, four USB 2.0 ports, integrated RJ-45 LAN on iLO MP card. None. Optional. One 650W power supply. You can install a second power supply to provide redundant (N+1) capability. rp3440 Four 64-bit PCI-X slots, 133 MHz, 3.3V slots. One serial port, four USB 2.0 ports, integrated RJ-45 LAN on iLO MP card. IDE interface; 48x speed. Optional. One 650W power supply. You can install a second power supply to provide redundant (N+1) capability.

Dimensions and Values

Table 2-2 lists dimensions and their values of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table 2-2

Server Dimensions and Values

Dimension Values 26.8 in (67.9 cm) max. x 19.0 in (48.3 cm) x3.4 in (8.6 cm) 26.6 in (67.5 cm) x 11.6 in (29.5 cm) x 19.5 in (49.4 cm) Minimum: 38.6 lbs (17.5 kg) Maximum: 49.0 lbs 22.2 kg Minimum: 49.4 lbs 22.4 kg Maximum: 56.3 lbs 25.5 kg 0.2 m2 (2.1 sq. ft.) 2U

Rack dimensions (depth x width x height) Pedestal dimensions (depth x width x height) Rack weight

Pedestal weight Pedestal footprint Rack units

48

Chapter 2

System Specifications Grounding

Grounding
The site building shall provide a safety ground or protective earth for each ac service entrance to all cabinets. Install a PE (protective earthing) conductor that is identical in size, insulation material, and thickness to the branch-circuit supply conductors. The PE conductor must be green with yellow stripes. The earthing conductor is to be connected from the unit to the building installation earth or, if supplied by a separately derived system, at the supply transformer or motor-generator set grounding point.

Electrical Specifications
This section provides electrical specifications for the server.

AC Power Cords
Table 2-3 lists the power cables available for use with the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table 2-3
Part Number 8120-5341 8120-1351

Power Cords
Description Power Cord C15/S Africa 2.5m black CA ASSY 917 Power Cord C13/BS-1363 2.3m black CA ASSY 900 Country South Africa United Kingdom Hong Kong Singapore Australia Europe Switzerland Denmark North America (250#V) Japan Israel Argentina Chile China South America All

8120-1369 8120-1689 8120-2104 8120-6814 8120-0698 8120-6800 8120-8390 8120-8389 8120-8376 8121-0668 8120-6514

Power Cord C13/AS-3112 2.0m gray CA ASSY 901 Power Cord C13/CEE 7 2.0m black CA ASSY 902 Power Cord C13/SEV 12 2.0m black CA ASSY 906 Power Cord OPT-912 3-COND 2.25-M-LG 912 Power Cord C13/6-15P 0.0m black CA ASSY 904 / 918 Power Cord OPT-919 3-COND 2.3-M-LG 919 Power Cord C15/CEI 23-16 2.5m black CA ASSY 920 Power Cord C15/CEI 23-16 2.5m black CA ASSY 921 Power Cord C13/GB-1002 2.236m gray CA ASSY 922 Power Cord OPT-927 3-COND 2.3-M-LG FLNT 927 C13/C14 Jumper cord

Chapter 2

49

System Specifications Electrical Specifications

Circuit Breaker
The marked electrical for the server is 7.2 amps. The recommended circuit breaker size is 12 amps per line cord (2 maximum) for North America. For countries outside North America, consult the local electrical authority that has jurisdiction for the recommended circuit breaker size.

System Power Specifications

Available power (output) is the maximum dc power that the power supply can supply to the system. Maximum input power is what the power supply requires from the ac line to deliver the maximum dc output (given worst case efficiency and max loading). Maximum input current is the worst case or highest current given the lowest input voltage and the maximum input power. Table 2-4 lists the system power specifications.

Table 2-4

System Power Specifications

Total Rating 100 240 VAC 7.2A at 115 VAC or 3.6A at 220 VAC 50 to 60 Hz 560W 650W 49A 0.35A 34A 18A 3.5A Off Off Off Off Off 0.5A Off Off 31A Off Peak (15 sec) Max. per PCI-X Sockets 64-bit, 133 MHz Off Off Off Off 85W total for PCI sockets Off 0.1A 4.6A 3A Off

Parameter Input voltage Input current (max) Input frequency Measured input power Available power (output) Maximum current at +12V Maximum current at 12V Maximum current at +3.3V Maximum current at +5V Maximum current at +3.3V standby

If an overload triggers the power supply overload protection, the system is immediately powered off. To reset the power supply unit, follow these steps: 1. Disconnect the power cord. 2. Determine what caused the overload by contacting a HP support representative. 3. Reconnect the power cord, then reboot the system. If an overload occurs twice, there is an undetected short circuit somewhere. When you use the front panels power button to power off the server, power consumption falls below the low power consumption, but doesnt reach zero. To reach zero power consumption in off mode, either unplug the server or use a power block with a switch.

50

Chapter 2

System Specifications Environmental Specifications

Power and Cooling

Typical power consumption for a server is 600W/2050 Btu/h. The power consumptions listed in Table 2-5 are valid for a standard configuration as shipped (one 1 GHz processor, 6 GB of memory, 650W power supply, three hard disk drives, one graphics card, one LVD SCSI card). All information in this section is based on primary power consumptions. Table 2-5 lists additional component power consumption information.

Table 2-5

Additional Component Power Consumption

Additional Component Power Consumption 130W 23W 16W 10W to 25W 443.6 Btu/h 78.4 Btu/h 54.5 Btu/h 34.12 Btu/h to 85.30 Btu/h

Processor SCSI hard disk drive (with I/O access) SCSI hard disk drive (idle) PCI card

Environmental Specifications
This section provides the temperature and humidity requirements, noise emission, and air flow specifications for the server. Operating temperature and humidity ranges might vary depending on the installed mass storage devices. High humidity levels can cause improper disk operation. Low humidity levels can aggravate static electricity problems and cause excessive wear of the disk surface. Table 2-6 lists the environmental specifications for a system processing unit with a hard disk drive.

Table 2-6

Environmental Specifications
Parameter Value +5C to +35C (+40F to +95F) 40C to +70C (40F to +158F) +40C (+104F) 15% to 80% relative (noncondensing) 8% to 85% relative (noncondensing) Sound power levela

Operating temperature Storage temperature Over-temperature shutdown Operating humidity Storage humidity Acoustic noise emission (ISO 7779) Pedestal system Typical configuration (disk idle)b Maximum configuration (disk idle)c

LwA = 5.1 BA LwA = 5.4 BA

Chapter 2

51

System Specifications Environmental Specifications

Table 2-6

Environmental Specifications (Continued)

Parameter Value LwA = 6.2 BA

Maximum configuration (disk active)c Rack system Typical configuration (disk idle)b Maximum configuration (disk idle)c Maximum configuration (disk active)c Operating altitude Storage altitude

LwA = 6.4 BA LwA = 6.4 BA LwA = 7.2 BA 3048m (10,000 ft.) max 4600m (15,000 ft.) max

a. Typical configuration at room temperature (25C). b. One processor enabled, one or two SCSI hard disk drives and less than 8 GB of memory. c. Two dual processors, one or two SCSI hard disk drives and less than 8 GB of memory.

Operating Environment
The system is designed to run continuously and meet reliability goals in an ambient temperature of 5C to 35C (+40F to +95F) at sea level. The maximum allowable temperature is de-rated 1C per 1,000 feet of elevation above 5,000 feet above sea level up to 30C at 10,000 feet. For optimum reliability and performance, the recommended operating range is 20C to 25C and 40% 55% relative humidity. Ambient intake air temperature is often different from ambient room temperature; you should measure the operating temperature and humidity directly in front of the cabinet cooling air intakes rather than just checking ambient room conditions.

Environmental Temperature Sensor

The server includes internal sensors that monitor input air temperature and server operating temperatures. The ambient air temperature is measured using a sensor placed on the system I/O board. Data from the sensor is used to control the fan speed and to initiate system overtemperature shutdown.

Nonoperating Environment
The system is designed to withstand ambient temperatures between 40C to 70C under nonoperating conditions.

Cooling
This section provides information on the cooling systems in the server. CPU and Memory Cooling The server incorporates front to back airflow across the processor and memory extender boards and through the HDD backplane. Two 127 mm dual fan assemblies, mounted vertically in the center of the chassis, pull air through the processor and memory section and push air through the PCI section.

52

Chapter 2

System Specifications Environmental Specifications Each processor and memory dedicated dual fan assembly is controlled by smart fan control circuits embedded in the system I/O board. The smart fan control circuit receives fan control input from the system fan controller in the I/O board, and returns fan status information to the system fan controller. The smart fan circuit controls the power and the pulse-width-modulated control signal to the fan and monitors the speed indicator back from each of the fans. The fan status LED is driven by the smart fan circuit. The fan status LED is located on the diagnostic board inside the system. Bulk Power Supply Cooling Cooling for the bulk power supplies is provided by one 120 mm dual fan assembly and one externally mounted 60 mm power supply fan. Air is pushed into both power supply bays by the 120 mm fan assembly and exhausted out the rear by the 60 mm fan (one per power supply). Air flows out of the rear of the chassis with minimal leakage into the cell airflow plenum.

NOTE

A power supply filler is required in the unused power supply slot to maintain proper airflow throughout the system.

PCI and Mass Storage Section Cooling Two dual fan assemblies located at the center of the chassis provide airflow for all the PCI slots. Airflow is over the processor and memory extender boards and into the PCI section. The fans are controlled by the system temperature and run at the speed necessary to maintain proper internal temperature throughout the chassis. The air is pulled through openings in the front cover and the mass storage devices and pushed through the PCI card cage. Perforation is provided between and above the PCI card cage to enable proper exhaust ventilation to maintain the required temperature rating of the PCI cards.

CAUTION

For maximum cooling effects, ensure that the chassis ventilation holes are not blocked or covered after installation.

Acoustic Noise Specification

The acoustic noise specification for the HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 servers is as follows: 53 db LpA (sound pressure level at bystander position in a dedicated computer room environment temperature of <25C)

Chapter 2

53

System Specifications Physical and Environmental Specifications

Physical and Environmental Specifications

Table 2-7 provides temperature and airflow information for minimum, typical, and maximum configurations for the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. It also lists the server and rack weights and dimensions.

Table 2-7

Physical and Environmental Specifications

Condition Typical Heat Release 100-250 VAC Weight Airflow, Nominal Airflow, at Maximum Ambient degrees Ca Server Alone Rack Pedestal Overall Server (W x D x H)

Rack

Pedestal

Min. Config. Max. Config. Typical Config.

341 Watts 57.8 CFM 98.3 m3/hr 68.2 CFM 115.94 m3/hr 38.6 lbs (17.5 kg) 49.0 lbs (22.2 kg) 56.3 lbs (25.5 kg) W: 19.0 in (48.3 cm) D: 26.8 in (67.9 cm) H: 3.4 in (8.6 cm) W: 11.6 in (29.5 cm) D: 26.6 in (67.5 cm) H: 19.5 in (49.4 cm)

536 Watts

426 Watts

ASHRAE Class 1

Airflow cooling scheme (front to rear)

Min./ Config. Max. Config.

One dual-core CPU, one power supply, 2 GB DIMM, zero DVD, three HDDs. Two dual-core CPUs, one power supply, 32 GB DIMM, one DVD, three HDDs, one graphics card, one SCSI card. One dual-core CPU, one power supply, 6 GB DIMM, one DVD, three HDDs, one graphics card, one SCSI card.

Typical Config.

a.

Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree per 300 meters above 900 meters.

54

Chapter 2

3 Installing the System

This chapter provides information on how to install the system. This chapter addresses the following topics: Introduction on page 55 Unpacking and Inspecting the Server on page 61 Installing Additional Components on page 63 Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP Rack, or Pedestal on page 104 Connecting the Cables on page 105 Console Setup on page 107 Accessing the Host Console on page 116 Powering the Server ON and OFF on page 119 Booting the Operating System on page 121 Troubleshooting on page 124

Introduction
The HP 9000 rp3410 server is a 1P/1C, 1P/2C, rack- or pedestal-mount server. Similarly, the HP 9000 rp3440 server is a 1P/1C, 1P/2C, 2P/2C or 2P/4C rack- or pedestal-mount server. Both of these servers are based on the PA-RISC processor family architecture. The server accommodates up to 12 DIMMs and internal peripherals including disks and DVD. Its high availability features include hot-swappable power supplies and hot-pluggable disk drives. The supported operating system is HP-UX 11i v1 (and newer HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems).

Chapter 3

55

Installing the System Introduction

Server Views
Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2, Figure 3-3, and Figure 3-4 show the front, rear, and pedestal-mount views of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Figure 3-1

HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Front View)

Figure 3-2

HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Front View with Bezel Removed)

Figure 3-3

HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Rear View)

56

Chapter 3

Installing the System Introduction

Figure 3-4

HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server (Pedestal Mount)

Chapter 3

57

Installing the System Introduction

Detailed Server Description

The following sections list the main subsystems within the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. Features Table 3-1 lists the features of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table 3-1
Features PA-8800 Processors PA-8900 Processors Memory HDDs

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 Server Features

rp340 One or two processors at 800 MHz with 1.5 MB L1 cache/32 MB L2 cache One or two processors at 800 MHz with 1.5 MB L1 cache/64 MB L2 cache Supports up to 6 GB Three 36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Hot Plug Disk or 3- 73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Hot Plug Disk or Three 146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Hot Plug Disk rp3440 One to four processors at 800 MHz (or 1 GHz) and 1 GHz with 1.5 MB L1 cache/32 MB L2 cache One to four processors at 800 MHz (or 1 GHz) and 1 GHz with 1.5 MB L1 cache/64 MB L2 cache Supports up to 24 GB Three 36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Hot Plug Disk or 3- 73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Hot Plug Disk or Three 146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Hot Plug Disk A6150B PCI card (optional) Integrated Ultra-3 SCSI dual-channel controller; 80 MBs transfer rate with one internal 68 pin connector and one external 68 pin connector. PCI Gigabit, fast Ethernet controller Four 64 bit hot-pluggable PCI-X slots, 133 MHz, 3.3V slots Three serial ports, 4 USB 2.0 ports, integrated RJ-45 LAN on iLO MP card. IDE interface; 48x speed Two-port U320 PCI-X RAID Smart Array 6402 (A9890A Controller) Redundant, (2N+1) 714 Watt HP-UX 11i v1, HP-UX 11i v2, and HP-UX 11i v3 (choice of Enterprise, Mission-Critical, Technical Computing, and Foundation operating environments)

Video SCSI

A6150B PCI card (optional) N/A

LAN PCI Slots Core I/O DVD External Storage Power Supply Operating Systems

PCI Gigabit, fast Ethernet controller Two 64 bit hot-pluggable PCI-X slots, 133 MHz, 3.3V slots Three serial ports, 4 USB 2.0 ports, integrated RJ-45 LAN on iLO MP card. N/A Two-port U320 PCI-X RAID Smart Array 6402 (A9890A Controller) Redundant, (2N+1) 714 Watt HP-UX 11i v1, HP-UX 11i v2, and HP-UX 11i v3 (choice of Enterprise, Mission-Critical, Technical Computing, and Foundation operating environments)

58

Chapter 3

Installing the System Introduction Firmware Firmware consists of many individually linked binary images that are bound together by a single framework at run time. Internally, the firmware employs a software database called a device tree to represent the structure of the hardware platform and to provide a means of associating software elements with hardware functionality. The firmware incorporates Boot Console Handler (BCH) which provides an interface between the operating system and the platform firmware. The firmware supports the HP-UX 11i version 1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems) operating system through the HP 9000 processor family standards and extensions, and has no operating system-specific functionality included. The operating system is presented with the same interface to system firmware, and all features are available to the operating system. Event IDs for Errors and Events The server firmware generates event IDs similar to chassis codes for errors, events, and forward progress to the Integrity Integrated Light-Out Management Processor (iLO MP) through common shared memory. The Integrity iLO MP interprets and stores event IDs. Reviewing these events helps you diagnose and troubleshoot problems with the server. Dimensions and Values Table 3-2 lists the dimensions and their values of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table 3-2

Server Dimensions and Values

Dimensions Values 26.8 in (67.9 cm) max x 19.0 in (48.3 cm) x 3.4 in (8.6 cm) 26.6 in (67.5 cm) x 11.6 in (29.5 cm) x 19.5 in (49.4 cm) Minimum: 38.6 lbs (17.5 kg) Maximum: 49.0 lbs (22.2 kg) Minimum: 49.4 lbs (22.4 kg) Maximum: 56.3 lbs (25.5 kg) 2.1 sq ft (0.2 m2) 2U

Rack dimensions (depth x width x height) Pedestal dimensions (depth x width x height) Rack weight

Pedestal weight Pedestal footprint Rack units

Safety Information
Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures. Voltages might be present within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge. Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components, to prevent injury, and to prevent damage to the server: When removing or installing any server component, follow the instructions provided in this guide. If installing a hot-swappable or hot-pluggable component when power is applied (fans are running), reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating.

Chapter 3

59

Installing the System Introduction If installing a hot-pluggable component, complete the required software intervention before removing the component. If installing an assembly that is neither hot-swappable, nor hot-pluggable, disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server before removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot-swappable or hot-pluggable component. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever a dc power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is turned off. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items. Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build up, such as wool or synthetic materials. If installing an internal assembly, wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1609). Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or any electrical components on accessory boards.

Installation Sequence and Checklist

Follow the steps in Table 3-3 sequentially to ensure successful installation of the server.

Table 3-3
Step 1 2 3 4 4a 4b 5 6 7 8 9

Installation Sequence Checklist

Description Completed

Unpack and inspect the server shipping container; inventory the contents using the packing slip. Install additional components shipped with the server. Install the server into a rack- or pedestal-mount. Connect cables to the server. Connect dc input power cable. Connect LAN core I/O cable. Set up the console. Power on the server. Access the console. Boot the operating system. Verify the server configuration.

60

Chapter 3

Installing the System Unpacking and Inspecting the Server

Unpacking and Inspecting the Server

This section describes procedures you perform before installation. Ensure that you have adequately prepared your environment for the new server, received the components that you ordered, and verified that the server and its containers are in good condition after shipment.

Verifying Site Preparation

Verifying site preparation is an essential factor of a successful server installation and includes the following tasks. Step 1. Gather LAN information and determine the two separate IP addresses for the iLO MP LAN and the system LAN. Step 2. Establish a method to connect to the server console. Step 3. Verify electrical requirements and ensure that grounding specifications and power requirements have been met. Step 4. Validate server physical space requirements. Step 5. Confirm environmental requirements.

Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage

HP shipping containers protect their contents under normal shipping conditions. After the equipment arrives, carefully inspect each carton for signs of shipping damage. Shipping damage constitutes moderate to severe damage, such as punctures in the corrugated carton, crushed boxes, or large dents. Normal wear or slight damage to the carton is not considered shipping damage. If you find shipping damage to the carton, contact your HP customer service representative immediately.

Unpacking the Server

To unpack a non-racked server, follow these steps.

NOTE

HP recommends the use of a lifter, such as a RonI Company model 17000 SP 400 lifting device, when moving a non-racked server.

Step 1. Use the instructions printed on the outside top flap of the carton; remove the banding and the outer carton from the server pallet. Step 2. Remove all inner accessory cartons and the top foam cushions, leaving only the server.

IMPORTANT Inspect each carton for shipping damage as you unpack the server.

Checking the Inventory

The sales order packing slip lists all of the equipment shipped from HP. Use this packing slip to verify that all of the equipment has arrived.

Chapter 3

61

Installing the System Unpacking and Inspecting the Server

NOTE

To identify each item by part number, see the sales order packing slip.

Returning Damaged Equipment

If the equipment is damaged, contact your HP customer service representative immediately. The service representative initiates appropriate action through the transport carrier or the factory and assists you in returning the equipment.

Unloading the Server with a Lifter

WARNING Use caution when using a lifter. Because of the weight of the server, you must center the server on the lifter forks before lifting it off the pallet to avoid injury.

To unload the server from the pallet using a lifter, follow these steps: Step 1. Unpack the server. Step 2. Unroll the bottom corrugated tray corresponding to the side on which the lifter will be placed, and slide the server as close to that edge of the pallet as possible. Step 3. Break off any foam packaging which could prevent the lifter from being fully inserted under the server. Do not remove the foam packaging from the corners of the server. This foam is required to elevate the server and enable the forks of the lifter to be placed under the server. Step 4. Insert the lifter forks under the server. Step 5. Carefully roll the lifters forward until it is fully against the side of the server. Step 6. Slowly raise the server off the pallet until it clears the pallet cushions. Step 7. Carefully roll the lifter and server away from the pallet. Do not raise the server any higher than necessary when moving it over to the rack.

62

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Installing Additional Components

This section describes how to install server components that are not installed before delivery.

Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels

To upgrade, remove, or replace most server components, you must first remove the covers from the server chassis. This section explains how to remove and replace the covers for both rack and pedestal-mounted configurations.

WARNING

Do not remove the server cover without first turning the server off and unplugging the power cord from the outlet or power protection device unless you are only replacing a hot-swappable fan. Always replace the cover before turning the server on.

Rack-Mounted Server To access the internal components on a rack-mounted server, pull the server out onto the rail guides and remove the top cover. Accessing a Rack-Mounted Server HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers are designed to be rack mounted. The following procedure explains how to gain access to a server that is mounted in an approved rack. For slide installation instructions, see the Installation Guide, Mid-Weight Slide Kit (HP part number 5065-7291). This document can be accessed on the Web at: http://www.hp.com/racksolutions.

WARNING

Ensure that all anti-tip features (front and rear anti-tip feet installed; adequate ballast properly placed; and so on) are employed before extending the server.

Extend the Server from the Rack

NOTE

Ensure that there is enough area (approximately 1.5 meters {4.5 ft.}) to fully extend the server out the front to work on it.

To extend the server from the rack, follow these steps:

NOTE

If you are replacing a hot-swappable item, you can leave the server on and external cables (including the power cord) connected.

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect the power and external cables from the back of the server. Step 2. Release the rack latches by rotating them outward.

Chapter 3

63

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-5 Release the Rack Latches

Step 3. Slide the server out of the rack until the guide-rail release clips are visible. Insert the Server into the Rack To insert the server into the rack, follow these steps: Step 1. Press the rail clips on either side of the server inward and push the server into the rack until it stops. Step 2. Verify that the rack latches are closed. Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server Removal of this cover is necessary when installing or removing many components. Removing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

NOTE

If you are replacing a hot-swappable item, you can leave the server on and external cables (including the power cord) connected.

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect the power and external cables from the back of the server. Step 2. Ensure the top cover lock keyswitch is in the unlocked position. Rotate the blue release lever toward the back of the server and slide the cover toward the back of the server.

64

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Figure 3-6 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

Step 3. Lift the cover off the server chassis. Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

CAUTION

Secure any wires or cables in the server so they will not get cut or interfere with the replacement of the cover.

Step 1. Align the front edge of the cover with the alignment mark on the optical drive bay. Figure 3-7 Aligning the Top Cover

To replace cover, align front edge here then slide forward

Chapter 3

65

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Step 2. Grasp the blue release lever and slide the cover toward the front of the server until the lever snaps into place. Figure 3-8 Closing the Top Cover

Step 3. Slide the server into the rack enclosure and reconnect the power and external cables. Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel on a Rack-Mounted Server You must remove the front bezel from the chassis to gain access to the power supplies and optical drive. Removing the Front Bezel on a Rack-Mounted Server Step 1. Press in on the retaining clips located on the right-side of the front panel. Figure 3-9 Front Bezel Retaining Clip

66

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Step 2. Rotate the front panel outward and lift it off the server chassis. Replacing the Front Bezel on a Rack-Mounted Server Step 1. Insert the bezel latches into the matching slots on the server chassis. Step 2. Close the bezel and push toward the front of the server until it locks into place.

Figure 3-10 Replacing the Front Bezel

Accessing a Pedestal-Mounted Server

NOTE

If you are replacing a hot-swappable item, you can leave the server on and external cables (including the power cord) connected.

Removing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect the power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the side cover. a. Grasp both indentations at the top of the side panel and pull outward. b. Lift the side cover off of the server chassis.

Chapter 3

67

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-11 Removing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Removing the Top Cover on Pedestal-Mounted Server To remove the top cover, follow these steps: Step 1. Turn the top cover lock keyswitch to the unlocked position. Step 2. Rotate the blue release handle to release the latch. Step 3. Slide the cover toward the back of the chassis and lift the cover off.

68

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-12 Removing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Step 4. Remove the top cover.

CAUTION

The server depends on the access panels being closed for proper cooling of internal components. Operating the server with the cover removed can cause the server to quickly overheat.

Replacing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

CAUTION

Secure any wires or cables in the server so they do not get cut or interfere with the replacement of the cover.

To replace the top cover, follow these steps: Step 1. Align the front edge of the top cover with the alignment mark on the optical drive bay.

Chapter 3

69

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-13 Top Cover Alignment Mark

To replace cover, align front edge here then slide forward

Step 2. Place the top cover on the chassis and slide it toward the front of the server until the blue release lever snaps in place.

Figure 3-14 Replacing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Replacing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server To replace the side cover, follow these steps: Step 1. Align the covers mounting holes with the matching tabs on the server chassis.

70

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-15 Replacing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Step 2. Close the cover until it snaps onto the server chassis. Removing and Replacing Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server You must remove the front bezel from the chassis to gain access to the power supplies and optical drive. Removing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server To remove the front bezel parts, follow these steps: Step 1. Use the indentation at the top edge of the bezel to pull the bezel away from the chassis and to a 45 degree angle.

Chapter 3

71

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Figure 3-16 Removing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Step 2. Lift the bezel off the mounting tabs and away from the chassis. Replacing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server To replace the front bezel parts, follow these steps: Step 1. Position the bezel at an approximate 45 degree angle and align the retaining slots at the bottom with the retaining tabs on the chassis. Press the bezel against the chassis to engage the tabs.

72

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Figure 3-17 Aligning the Pedestal Front Bezel

Step 2. Rotate the bezel against the chassis so that it snaps into place.

Installing Internal Hard Disk Drives

This section provides information about installing additional internal hard disk drives.

CAUTION

A hot-pluggable device can require interaction with the operating server before the device can be safely installed into the server. Verify that the operating system supports installing disk drives while the operating system is running. If the operating system does not support this feature, shut down the operating system before attempting this procedure. Failure to observe this caution will result in system failure.

Chapter 3

73

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-18

Front View of the HP 9000 rp3410/rp3440 Server

Control Panel DVD Drive

LVD HDD 3 LVD HDD 2

System Product Label (pull-out)

LVD HDD 1

Two additional hard disk drives can be added to the server in slots 2 and 3. Always use low profile disk drives (1 inch height) in HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. To install a hard disk drive, follow these steps: Step 1. If you will be locking the hard drive in place, you must remove the cover to access the hard drive lock. Proceed as follows: a. If rack-mounted, slide the server out from the rack until it stops. (See Extend the Server from the Rack on page 63.) b. Remove the cover and bezel. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63.) Step 2. Remove the slot filler that is installed in the slot where the additional drive is to be installed.

74

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-19 Filler Removal from Slot 1

Step 3. Slide the hard disk drive into the slot until it is seated.

Figure 3-20 Disk Drive Installation in Slot 3

Step 4. Close the drive ejector handle by pushing it down until it clicks. Step 5. If desired, lock the hard drive in place.

Chapter 3

75

Installing the System Installing Additional Components a. Press the hard drive locking lever down into the locked position. b. Replace the cover and bezel. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63.)

Figure 3-21 Hard Drive Lock

Step 6. Verify the drive installation by using the system utilities. Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the offline diagnostic environment to exercise the module added.

Step 7. If rack-mounted, slide the server back into the rack until it stops. Step 8. Check the installation of the hard disk drive by powering on the server and checking the virtual front panel and System Event Log (SEL) for correct status for the hard disk drive.

76

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Installing a DVD Drive

Install a DVD drive behind the front bezel.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a removable media drive. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server. Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic server behavior or system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

Figure 3-22

DVD Drive Installation

Chapter 3

77

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Installing the DVD Drive To install a DVD drive, follow these steps: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the front bezel and cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63.) Step 3. If a removable media drive has not previously been installed in the server, the drive slot will be covered with a DVD drive filler. Remove the DVD drive filler. Step 4. Slide the drive into the drive bay until it stops sliding and the retaining clips on both sides of the drive snap into place (Figure 3-22). Step 5. Connect the IDE cable on the back of the drive (Figure 3-22). Step 6. Replace the cover and bezel. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63.) Step 7. Reconnect the power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 8. Verify the drive operation by using the system utilities. Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the offline diagnostic environment to exercise the newly installed module.

Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides

You must remove airflow guides before installing processors or memory. The server has the following airflow guides: The processor airflow guide ensures that the proper volume of air for cooling the dual processor module power pods, processor modules, and voltage regulator modules flows over these components. You must remove the processor airflow guide before removing or installing a dual processor module. The memory airflow guide ensures that the proper volume of air flows over the memory DIMMs to cool them. You must remove the memory airflow guide to access memory DIMMs and sockets.

NOTE

Air flows through the server from front to back.

78

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-23

Airflow Guides Locations

Processor Airflow Guide Front Portion of Processor Airflow Guide

Memory Airflow Guide

Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide Removing the Memory Airflow Guide Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the server chassis cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 3. Grasp the memory airflow guide and lift it out of the server.

Figure 3-24 Removing the Memory Airflow Guide

Chapter 3

79

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide Step 1. Align the guides on both sides of the airflow guide with the slots on the chassis. Step 2. Insert the memory airflow guide in the slots. Step 3. Replace the cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Removing and Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide Removing the Processor Airflow Guide Step 1. Power off the server, disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the server cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 3. Remove the IDE cable and power module cables from the processor airflow guide cable clips. Step 4. Remove the main portion of the airflow guide: a. Hold the guide using the opening on top of the guide. b. At the same time, grasp the back end of the processor airflow guide and lift the guide out of the server.

Figure 3-25 Removing the Processor Airflow Guide

Step 5. Grasp system fan 1A and lift it from its socket.

80

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-26 Removing Fans 1A and 1B

Fan 1A

Fan 1B

Step 6. Grasp system fan 1B and lift it from its socket (Figure 3-26). Step 7. Remove the memory airflow guide. Removing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 79 Step 8. Rotate the clip clockwise to release the latch.

Chapter 3

81

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-27 Open the Release Clip

Step 9. Disconnect the power cable connected to the guide from the system board by squeezing the clips. Step 10. Lift the front portion of the processor airflow guide out of the server.

Figure 3-28 Remove the Front Portion of the Processor Airflow Guide

82

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide Step 1. Replace the front portion of the airflow guide: a. Align the release latch of the front half of the airflow guide over the release latch post and snap it in place. b. Connect the power connector on the front portion of the guide to the connector on the system board. Step 2. Insert system fans 1A and 1B into their mounting positions. Step 3. Route the processor turbo fan power cables through the processor heatsink posts so that the cables will not be pinched between the heatsink posts and the processor airflow guide (Figure 3-29).

CAUTION

Turbo fan power cables can be damaged if pinched between the heatsink posts and the processor airflow guide. Ensure that the cables are below the top surface of the heatsink posts before installing the processor airflow guide.

Figure 3-29 Routing the Turbofan Power Cables through Heatsink Posts

Step 4. Replace the main portion of the airflow guide: a. Hold the opening on top of the processor airflow guide. b. At the same time, grasp the back end of the airflow guide and insert the airflow guide into the server. c. Connect the power module cable. d. Place the power and IDE cables in the cable clips. e. Insert the two airflow guide retaining tabs into the two slots on the front half of the airflow guide. f. Replace the memory airflow guide. Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 80 Step 5. Replace the server cover.

Chapter 3

83

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Installing Additional System Memory

The server has 12 memory sockets for installing DDR SDRAM memory modules. System memory DIMMs are located on the system board.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing system memory. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.

Supported DIMM Sizes Supported DIMM sizes are as follows: 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB) 4 GB (HP 9000 rp3440 only). If 4 GB DIMMs are used, only one configuration (8 X 4 GB in the first eight sockets) is supported.

Dissimilar DIMM sizes can be used across the entire system board (except when 4 GB DIMMs are used) but both DIMMs in a pair (first group of four, connectors 0A and 0B of HP 9000 rp3410) and all four DIMMs of any quad must be identical.

84

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-30

DIMM Slot Identification

Rear

Pair 6 (5A&5B) Pair 4 (3A&3B) Pair 2 (1A&1B)

Cell 1

1B 5B

1A 3A 3B 5A

Cell 0

0B Pair 1 (0A&0B) Pair 3 (2A & Pair 5

2B 4B 0

4A

2A Quad 1 = Pair 1 & Pair 2 Quad 2 = Pair 3 & Pair 4 Quad 3 = Pair 5 & Pair 6

Front

Installing System Memory When adding DIMMs, you must use a minimum of four like-sized DIMMs in the next available quad. If you are installing DIMMs of different sizes, you must install the largest DIMMs (most memory) in the first quad. DIMMs in the second quad can be equal to or smaller than (less memory) the DIMMs in the first quad. If you install DIMMs in the third quad, they must be equal to or smaller than the DIMMs in the second quad. rp3410 Memory Configuration T The HP 9000 rp3410 server supports DDR SDRAM DIMMs with ECC and chip spare protection. This server has 12 DIMM slots and supports a maximum of six GB of total system memory. Memory usage in the server varies with the model designation.

Chapter 3

85

Installing the System Installing Additional Components In the original server (model A7136A), memory can be installed as one or two pairs in the first quad (group of four). This allows memory configurations of two, four, eight, or twelve DIMMs. In the current server (model A7136B), memory must be installed as quads (groups of four). This allows memory configurations of four, eight, or twelve DIMMs. Thus, the HP 9000 rp3410 server must include a minimum of 512 MB (model A7136A) or 1 GB (model A7136B) and can include up to six GB of memory in combinations of 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB DIMMs. Different size DIMMs can be installed in the server, but all four DIMMs in a quad must be identical. Memory Loading Rules and Performance Guidelines DIMMs must be installed in server load sequence (the first DIMM must be in the first slot, the second DIMM must be in the second slot, and so on). A minimum of 512 MB (2 x 256 MB DIMMs in a model A7136A server) or 1 GB (4 x 256 MB DIMMs in a model A7136B server) of memory must be installed in a HP 9000 rp3410 server. Maximum memory is 6 GB. A minimum of two DIMMs (one pair) is required in the model A7136A server. A minimum of four DIMMs (one quad) is required in the model A7136B server. All DIMMs within a quad must be identical. Memory can be ordered in amounts of 1 GB (4 x 256 MB), 2 GB (4 x 512 MB), 4 GB (4 x 1 GB), 8 GB (4 x 2 GB), and 16 GB (4 x 4 GB). Memory is loaded across both memory busses (two DIMMs on each bus) to ensure maximum bandwidth and performance. Total memory bandwidth is 8.5 GB/s, split across two 4.25 GB/s memory buses. Open page memory latency is 80 nanoseconds.

rp3440 Memory Configuration The HP 9000 rp3440 supports DDR SDRAM DIMMs with ECC and chip spare protection. This server has 12 DIMM slots, but maximum system memory is 32 GB due to cooling limitations. Memory must be installed as quads (groups of four). This allows memory configurations of four, eight, or twelve DIMMs. Thus, the HP 9000 rp3440 server must include a minimum of 1 GB and can include up to 24 GB of memory in combinations of 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB DIMMs, or 32 GB of memory consisting of eight 4 GB DIMMs. Different size DIMMs can be installed in the server (except when 4 GB DIMMs are used), but all four DIMMs in a quad must be identical. Memory Loading Rules and Performance Guidelines Minimum memory is 1 GB (4 x 256 MB). Maximum memory is 32 GB (8 x 4 GB installed in the first eight slotsthe remaining slots must remain empty if 4 GB DIMMs are installed). Memory DIMMs must be installed in groups of four (quads). All DIMMs within a quad must be identical. Memory must be loaded in the specific order outlined on the system board. Memory can be ordered in amounts of 512 MB (2 x 256 MB), 1 GB (4 x 256 MB), 2 GB (4 x 512 MB), 4 GB (4 x 1 GB), 8 GB (4 x 2 GB), and 16 GB (4 x 4 GB). Each quad of memory is loaded across both memory buses (two DIMMs on each bus) to ensure maximum bandwidth and performance.

86

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Total memory bandwidth is 8.5 GB/s, split across two 4.25 GB/s memory buses. Open page memory latency is 80 nanoseconds.

The memory subsystem supports chip-spare functionality. Chip spare enables an entire SDRAM chip on a DIMM to be bypassed (logically replaced) in the event that a multi-bit error is detected on that SDRAM. In order to use the chip spare functionality, only DIMMs built with x4 SDRAM parts can be used, and these DIMMs must be loaded in quads (two DIMMs per memory cell, loaded in the same location in each memory cell). System Firmware Requirements If you are using 4 GB DIMMs in a HP 9000 rp3440 server, system firmware must be greater than revision 44.24. Use the BCH FV command, or the iLO MP SR command to display the system firmware revision status. If necessary, use the iLO MP SR command to upgrade system firmware. (Detailed instructions are downloaded with the upgrade.) Installation Procedure To install DIMMs, follow these steps: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect all power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the server cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63.) Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide. (See Removing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 79.)

CAUTION

To ensure that memory modules are not damaged during removal or installation, power off the server and unplug the power cord from the ac power outlet. Wait until the LED on the back of the power supply turns off before removing or installing memory.

Step 4. Locate the slot into which the DIMM will be installed. Holding the memory module by its left and right edges, insert the module into the socket (Figure 3-31.)

NOTE

The memory modules are keyed and can only be inserted in one direction. When the module is correctly seated, the retainer clips will return to their fully upright position. Snap the clips firmly into place to ensure that the DIMMs are seated properly.

Step 5. Evenly push down firmly on each end of the DIMM until it seats in the socket. Ensure the extraction levers are in the closed position.

Chapter 3

87

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-31 Inserting DIMM into Connector

Step 6. Replace the memory airflow guide. (See Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 80.) Step 7. Replace the server cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 8. Reconnect all power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 9. Verify the memory installation by using the system utilities. Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the offline diagnostic environment (ODE) to exercise the memory added.

Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage

Accessory cards are installed in a removable PCI card cage. This section explains how to remove and replace the PCI card cage. Removal is required to install accessory cards. Removing the PCI Card Cage To remove the PCI card cage from the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Remove the cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 2. Disconnect the cables from the PCI cards.

88

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Step 3. Lift up on the PCI card cage release lever and the back edge of the PCI card cage and lift the PCI card cage out of the server.

Figure 3-32 Removing the PCI Card Cage

Step 4. Grasp the PCI card cage cover and slide it away from the bulkhead end of the cage, then lift the cover off.

Chapter 3

89

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-33 Removing the PCI Card Cage Cover

Step 5. Unscrew the bulkhead screw that holds the accessory card holder (if installed) in place. Step 6. The PCI slots are now accessible for installation of additional cards. Replacing the PCI Card Cage To replace the PCI card cage, follow these steps: Step 1. Hold the PCI card cage cover in mounting position and slide it toward the bulkhead end of the cage. Step 2. Hold the PCI card cage above the chassis mounting position, such that the bulkhead end of the cage is toward the rear of the server. (Figure 3-32.) Step 3. Hold the PCI card cage release lever in the raised position and lower the card cage into the server chassis. Step 4. Press the PCI card cage release lever into the lowered position to lock the card cage into the server chassis.

Installing PCI Cards

The server can contain up to 4 PCI cards. PCI cards are located in the PCI card cage. The HP 9000 rp3410 server provides two 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card sockets as slots 1 and 2. The HP 9000 rp3440 server provides four 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card sockets as slots 1 through 4. HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers have the following accessory card sockets: Four 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card sockets.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a PCI card. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position.

90

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.

Carefully read the following information concerning PCI slot configuration. Inserting a PCI card into a slot that is not configured to accept it can cause operation failure or the PCI card to operate at less than optimum speed. PCI slots are numbered 1 (top of card cage) through 4 (bottom of card cage). See the labels on the rear panel of the chassis for correct PCI slot number identification. Installing a PCI Card Step 1. Remove the cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 2. Remove the PCI cage. (See Removing the PCI Card Cage on page 88.) Step 3. Grasp the edges of the PCI card to be installed and evenly press the card into the PCI backplane connector.

Figure 3-34 Installing a PCI Card

Step 4. Connect any internal cables that are required by the PCI card. Step 5. Install the accessory card holder and secure in place by tightening the associated bulkhead screws. Step 6. Reinstall the PCI cage. (See Replacing the PCI Card Cage on page 90.) Step 7. Replace the cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 8. Verify the PCI card installation by using the system utilities.

Chapter 3

91

Installing the System Installing Additional Components Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the offline diagnostic environment to exercise the card added.

Installing an Additional Power Supply

The supported configuration of the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers requires a minimum of one power supply to be installed. A second, optional hot-swappable power supply, can be installed to provide redundant (N+1) capability. The power supplies in the server are hot-swappable; that is, if one power supply stops working or exhibits voltage problems, the remaining supply can support the server until the failed unit is replaced. A power supply can be removed and replaced without turning off the server on servers with two power supplies.

CAUTION

Before removing a power supply, make sure the second power supply functions properly. The two green LEDs inside the supply must both be lit on the second supply before the failed power supply can be safely removed.

To replace the power supply, follow these steps: Step 1. Remove the front bezel from the server (See Removing and Replacing Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server on page 71.) Step 2. Remove the power supply filler panel.

Figure 3-35 Removing the Power Supply Filler Panel

Power Supply 1

Step 3. Open the power supply release lever and slide the power supply into place.

92

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-36 Replacing the Power Supply

Power Supply

Power Supply 1

Step 4. Push in on the power supply release lever to lock the retaining clip in place. Step 5. Replace the front bezel. (See Removing and Replacing Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server on page 71.) Step 6. Verify that both power supply LEDs are lit. Step 7. Use the iLO MP PS command to verify power supply operation.

Installing an Additional Processor Module

This section provides information about installing dual processor modules. The modules are located on the system board which is accessible by removing the server cover. The HP 9000 rp3410 server supports one processor socket. This socket will accept one dual processor module which contains two 800 MHz CPUs. The HP 9000 rp3410 server 1P/1C configuration includes two CPUs in a single module, but only one CPU is enabled. (The second CPU can be enabled as part of a server upgrade.) The HP 9000 rp3440 server supports two processor sockets. Each socket will accept one dual processor module which contains either two 800 MHz CPUs or two 1 GHz CPUs.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a dual processor module. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Chapter 3

93

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

CAUTION

Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic server behavior or system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider. Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.

NOTE

Processor tool kit (HP part number 5069-5441) is required for installation of a processor module.

Processor modules are located on the system board. The system board can support either one or two dual processor modules. The CPU0 socket is located at the right of the system board and the CPU1 socket is located at the left of the system board next to the bridge assembly. In a 1P/1C, 1P/2C server, the single dual processor module must be installed in the CPU0 socket. Install a second dual processor module as follows: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect all power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63.) Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide. (See Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 80.) Step 4. Remove the processor airflow guide. (See Removing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 80.) Step 5. Unlock the dual processor module locking mechanism using the CPU install tool (2.5 mm driver or Allen Wrench). Insert the tool into the hole that runs down through the edge of the heatsink and rotate the special processor tool 180 degrees counterclockwise. Verify that the dual processor module socket locking mechanism is rotated into the unlocked position.

Figure 3-37 Unlocking the Dual Processor Module Locking Mechanism

CPU Install Tool (2.5 mm Driver or Allen Wrench)

Step 6. Remove any protective packaging from the processor module.

94

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

NOTE

Protective covers can be installed to protect connector pins. These covers can be saved for future use.

Step 7. Use the four locator posts on the heatsink and the turbo fan power cable to properly align the fan and dual processor module on the system board. The four locator posts will fit in locator holes on the system board processor module mount. The turbo fan power cable must be positioned so that it is located on the side of the heatsink that faces the front of the server.

Figure 3-38 Aligning the Processor Module

Step 8. Use the special CPU install tool (2.5 mm driver or Allen Wrench) to lock the dual processor module in place on the system board. To do this, insert the CPU install tool into the hole that runs down the side of the heatsink and rotate it clockwise 180 degrees.

Chapter 3

95

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-39 Locking the Dual Processor Module in Place

CPU Install Tool (2.5 mm Driver or Allen Wrench)

Step 9. Slide the sequencing retainer plate toward the front of the server.

Figure 3-40 Slide the Sequencing Retainer Plate

Step 10. Screw in the four heatsink captive screws in a criss-cross torquing pattern by alternately tightening the screws so as not to completely tighten one screw before the others.

96

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-41 Secure the Captive Screws

CPU Install Tool

Step 11. Locate the two power pod module shims on the system board. (On servers delivered with only one dual processor module installed, the power module shims are held in place by screws with plastic spacers over the threads.) Remove the holding screws and discard the plastic spacers. Retain the screws for use when installing the power module.

Figure 3-42 Power Module Shims

Screws Spacers Shims

Step 12. Slide the power pod module on the system boards metal mounting bracket so that the power pod module connector connects with its connector on the processor module.

Chapter 3

97

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-43 Aligning the Processor Module Power Pod

Step 13. Align the two mounting screw holes on the power pod module with the screw holes in the shims on the system boards metal mounting bracket. Screw in the power pod module mounting screws. (Use the screws removed in step 11.)

98

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-44 Installing the Processor Module Power Pod Mounting Screws

Step 14. Connect the power pod cable to the power connector on the system board.

Chapter 3

99

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-45 Connecting the Power Pod Cable

100

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

CAUTION

Turbo fan power cables can be damaged if pinched between the heatsink posts and the processor airflow guide. Ensure that the cables are below the top surface of the heatsink posts before installing the processor airflow guide.

Step 15. Route the turbo fan power cables through the heatsink posts so that the cables will not be pinched when the processor airflow guide is set in place.

Figure 3-46 Routing the Turbofan Power Cables through Heatsink Posts

Step 16. Connect the turbo fan power cable to the system board. Step 17. Replace the processor airflow guide. (See Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 83.) Step 18. Replace the memory airflow guide. (See Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 80.) Step 19. Replace the cover. (See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server on page 64.) Step 20. Reconnect power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 21. Verify processor installation by using the system utilities. Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation Use the BCH commands to verify operation Use MAKODIAG provided by the offline diagnostic environment to exercise the processor added

Chapter 3

101

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Replacing the System Battery

The server has two batteries. The main system battery is located on the system board. The other battery is located on the underside of the iLO MP card. Battery Notice This product contains a Lithium battery.

WARNING

Lithium batteries can explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of lithium batteries in a fire. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Replace only with the identical or equivalent battery. Follow the manufacturers recommendations. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. Replacing the System Battery Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63 for instructions.) Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide (See Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 79.) Step 4. Remove the processor airflow guide, the front portion of the processor airflow guide, and fans 1A and 1B (See Removing and Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 80.) Step 5. Lift up the battery retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and push on the back of the battery to remove the battery from its holder. Step 6. Lift up on the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the battery into the holder. The positive (+) terminal of the battery faces up.

CAUTION

Only lift the battery high enough to clear the holder. Excessive stress on the battery holder retaining clip can damage the clip.

102

Chapter 3

Installing the System Installing Additional Components

Figure 3-47 Replacing the System Battery

Step 7. Replace the cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezels on page 63 for instructions.) Step 8. Reconnect power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 9. Reset the server time and date using the BCH DATE command. Once you have set the time and date: a. Power off power off the server, unplug the power cord, and wait for a minute before turning it back on. b. Execute the DATE command again. If the time and date are now correct, you have installed the battery correctly. Step 10. If necessary, reconfigure the iLO MP.

Chapter 3

103

Installing the System Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP Rack, or Pedestal

Installing the Server Into a Rack, Non-HP Rack, or Pedestal

The following information describes how to install the server into an HP rack. Information is also provided on approved non-HP rack and pedestal-mounted alternatives.

HP Rack
HP 9000 entry class servers that are installed into racks are shipped with equipment mounting slides. The Mid-Weight Slide Kit, (HP part number 5065-7291) is provided with each set of slides. Follow the steps in the kit installation guide to determine where and how to place the server into the rack. The following are additional instructions for installing the server into the rack: Step 1. Switch the CMA from a left- to a right-mount configuration. The cable management arm (CMA) is factory-configured to mount on the left side of the server (as viewed from the rear of the chassis). Mount the CMA on the right side of the server to ensure easy removal of the power supplies. Step 2. Remove two T120 screws from the server bezel; one screw from the same location on each side of the server. The screws are located behind the pull handles.

Non-HP Rack
Use the Mounting in non-HP racks guide for evaluating the installation of HP equipment in non-HP racks. The guide provides information to help you determine if you need to qualify whether you can install, maintain, and service any HP equipment in a non-HP rack. The guide is located on the Web at: http://www.hp.com/racksolutions Once there, select Mounting information from the menu and select the guide titled Mounting in non-HP racks.

Pedestal Mount
If you ordered the server as rackless, it has a pedestal pre-installed at the factory. If the server is a rack-mounted and you want to change it to a pedestal-mount (rackless), you need a Server Rackless Mount Kit. This kit comes with an installation guide titled Converting Your Rack Server to a Rackless Mount (part number A6979-96001). To convert a rack-mount server to a pedestal-mount server, see Converting Your Rack Server to a Pedestal Server on the Web at: http://www.hp.com/ Follow the instructions in the kit installation guide to attach the pedestal to the server.

104

Chapter 3

Installing the System Connecting the Cables

Connecting the Cables

This section describes the cables to connect to power the server and to provide LAN connectivity for the server.

AC Input Power
The server comes with one or two power supplies installed. A power supply includes an ac input connector which is rated for 200 to 240 VAC at 13 amps. If two power supplies are installed, both power supplies must be connected separately to an ac power source.

Core I/O Connections

Each HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 server core I/O includes: Four USB ports. Two 9-pin serial ports (console A and serial B are for factory use only). One iLO MP I/O interface. One 10/100 management LAN-RJ45. One 25-pin serial, console/remote/UPS. LVD/SE SCSI port. The SCSI port is used to attach SCSI external mass storage to the server. Connections to the SCSI board include the external SCSI channels for external mass storage devices. CAUTION Some restrictions apply to the mass storage devices that can be connected to the core I/O SCSI HBA. External connections to the SCSI HBA core I/O controller are only supported when the internal cable between the SCSI backplane and the SCSI HBA core I/O card is disconnected. The server is shipped in simplex configuration which supports external devices. If you convert the server to duplex configuration, you cannot install external SCSI devices.

LAN Connection. The LAN board provides the basic external I/O connectivity for the server. One 10/100/1000 Base-T LAN RJ45 connector.

One 15-pin VGA port. This port is currently disabled. DO NOT USE THE PORT. For graphics capability, install the accessory graphics PCI card (HP part number A6150B). Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before attempting the following procedures. Voltage is present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

WARNING

Chapter 3

105

Installing the System Connecting the Cables

Applying Standby Power to the Server

To apply standby power to the server, follow these steps: Step 1. If the server has one power supply installed in slot P1, plug the power cord into that receptacle. Plug the other end of the power cord into an appropriate outlet.

NOTE

The LED on the power supply does not illuminate in the standby power state. The LED illuminates when the server is powered on to full power. If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged into the server.

Step 2. If the server has two power supplies, plug the second power cord into the power supply in slot P2. Plug the other end of the power cord into an appropriate outlet.

Connecting to the LAN

The server has the following ports that provide network connectivity: iLO MP LAN port. Use this port to access the iLO MP through the LAN. Console/Remote/UPS port (RS-232). Use this port to access the iLO MP through the console.

Figure 3-48 shows the LAN ports on the server rear.

Figure 3-48

LAN Ports on Server Rear

Console/Remote/UPS Port (M Cable & RS-232 DB-9F to DB-9F) Serial A/Console Port (factory use only)

VGA Port-disabled DO NOT USE

iLO MP LAN Port (10/100 LAN Cable) 10/100/1000 LAN Port

USB Ports (Windows) Mouse & Keyboard

Serial B/Console Port (factory use only)

To enable general network connectivity for the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Obtain a valid IP address for each LAN port you plan to activate. Step 2. Connect the LAN cable from an available LAN port into a live connection on the network.

106

Chapter 3

Installing the System Console Setup

Console Setup
This section describes how to set up and start a console session on the server and includes the following steps: Determine the physical access method to connect cables. There are two physical connections to the iLO MP: LAN RS-232 serial port Configure the iLO MP and assign an IP address if necessary. Though there are several methods to configuring the LAN, DHCP with DNS is the preferred method. DHCP with DNS comes preconfigured with default factory settings, including a default user account and password. Other options include: ARP Ping Local RS-232 serial port Remote/modem port

Setup Checklist
Use the setup checklist to assist with the iLO MP setup process.

Table 3-4

Setup Checklist
Step Action X

Standard Setup 1 Preparation 1. Determine an access method to select and connect the cables. 2. Determine a LAN configuration method and assign an IP address if necessary. 2 Configure the iLO MP LAN Choose one of the three methods to configure the LAN for iLO MP access: 3 4 5 6 Log on to the iLO MP Change default user name and password Set up user accounts Set up security access DHCP with DNS ARP Ping RS-232 serial port

Log in to the iLO MP from a supported Web browser or command line using the default user name and password. Change the default user name and password on the administrator account to your predefined selections. Set up the user accounts if you are using the local accounts feature. Set up the security access settings.

Advanced Setup 1 Activate Advanced Pack Features Activate advanced features by entering a license key.

Chapter 3

107

Installing the System Console Setup

Setup Flowchart
Use this flowchart as a guide to assist in the iLO MP setup process.

Figure 3-49

iLO MP Setup Flowchart

, and address and IP IP address

108

Chapter 3

Installing the System Console Setup

Preparation
You must perform the following tasks before you can configure the iLO MP LAN. Determine the physical access method to select and connect cables. Determine the iLO MP LAN configuration method and assign an IP address if necessary.

Determining the Physical iLO MP Access Method Before you can access the iLO MP, you must first determine the correct physical connection method. The iLO MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port. It requires a separate LAN drop, IP address, and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system. Table 3-5 lists the appropriate connection method, required connection components, and connectors to the host console. Use Table 3-5 to determine the physical connection method.

Table 3-5
Operating System HP-UX

Console Connection Matrix

Console Connection Method LAN LAN port Local RS-232 serial port Remote/modem port Required Connection Components 10/100 LAN cable 1. RS-232 DB-9F to DB-9F straight cable 2. Console device (for example, a laptop or ASCII terminal)

Determining the iLO MP LAN Configuration Method To access the iLO MP through the iLO MP LAN, the iLO MP must acquire an IP address. The way the iLO MP acquires an IP address depends on whether DHCP is enabled or disabled on the server, and if DHCP and DNS services are available to the server. (See Table 3-6 for possible scenarios.) Once you have determined the iLO MP access, you must determine how you will configure the iLO MP LAN to acquire an IP address using the following methods: DHCP/DNS through the management LAN: use the DNS name located on the toe-tag on the server. Setting up a static IP number using a laptop with DHCP services and the management LAN. ARP Ping to set a static IP address using a laptop and the management LAN. Local RS-232 serial port and a serial console Remote/modem port

Table 3-6 provides all the possible scenarios. Use this table to help you select the appropriate LAN configuration method to obtain an IP address.

Table 3-6
DHCP Yes Yes No DNS Yes Yes No

LAN Configuration Methods

RS-232 Serial Port (iLO MP LC command) No Yes No DHCP DHCP, RS-232 serial port, or remote/modem port ARP Ping LAN Configuration Method

Chapter 3

109

Installing the System Console Setup

Table 3-6
DHCP No No Yes No Yes DNS Yes Yes No No No

LAN Configuration Methods (Continued)

RS-232 Serial Port (iLO MP LC command) No Yes Yes Yes No ARP Ping ARP Ping, RS-232 serial port, or remote/modem port RS-232 serial port, or remote/modem port RS-232 serial port, remote/modem port, or ARP Ping Cannot set up the LAN. Reconsider your criteria. LAN Configuration Method

Once you have determined how you will configure the iLO MP LAN in order to acquire an IP address, you must configure the iLO MP LAN using the selected method.

Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS

DHCP automatically configures all DHCP-enabled servers with IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses. All HP 9000 entry class servers with the iLO MP are shipped from the factory with DHCP enabled.

TIP

HP recommends using the DHCP and DNS method to simplify access to the iLO MP.

When you use DHCP and DNS, you can connect to the iLO MP by typing the DNS name in your browser rather than an IP address only if the following conditions apply: DHCP must be enabled (DHCP is enabled by default). You are using a DHCP server that provides the domain name and the primary DNS server IP address. The primary DNS server accepts dynamic DNS (DDNS) updates. The primary DNS server IP address has been configured through the DHCP server.

To configure the iLO MP using DHCP and DNS, follow these steps: Step 1. Obtain the factory-set DNS name from the toe-tag on the server. The DNS name is 14 characters long, consisting of the letters mp followed by the 12 characters of the MAC address, for example: mp0014c29c064f. This address is assigned to the iLO MP card. The iLO MP card has a unique MAC address that identifies the card on the network. Step 2. Connect the LAN cable from the server to an active network port. Step 3. Apply ac power to the server (if not already done). Step 4. Open a browser, telnet, or SSH client and enter the default host name. The iLO MP Log In window opens.

Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using ARP Ping

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and Packet Internet Grouper (Ping) utility uses ARP packets to ping, or discover, a device on the local network segment. The IP address you assign to the server must use the same network segment, or subnet, as the computer assigning the address. ARP does not work across routed or switched networks.

110

Chapter 3

Installing the System Console Setup ARP Ping operational issues include the following: You can use ARP Ping regardless of the status of DHCP, unless an IP address has ever been acquired using DHCP When ARP Ping is successful, DHCP status is disabled Some DHCP server options can cause the apparent issuance of ARP Ping to the iLO MP which negates the DHCP/DDNS method The PC and the server must be on the same physical subnet When a new server is first booted, DHCP is automatically available (factory-set default); but ARP Ping does not start until three minutes after the iLO MP is booted. This applies to every subsequent boot of the iLO MP until an IP address is obtained by DHCP or has been assigned using the LC command, or ARP Ping succeeds

There are two ways to use the ARP Ping utility: Connect a PC to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server and run the ARP Ping commands from the PC. Locate an existing server on the network, log into it, and run the ARP Ping commands from the server.

Table 3-7 lists the ARP Ping commands.

Table 3-7
Command arp -s

ARP Ping Commands

Description This command assigns an IP address to the iLO MP MAC address. This ARP table entry maps the MAC address of the iLO MP LAN interface to the static IP address designated for that interface. This command tests network connections. It verifies that the iLO MP LAN port is configured with the appropriate IP address.

ping

The following procedure explains how to use the ARP Ping utility using a PC that is connected to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server. To configure a static IP address using the ARP Ping utility, follow these steps: Step 1. Obtain the iLO MP MAC address. To set the IP address using ARP, you must know the MAC address of the iLO MP LAN. You can find the MAC address of the iLO MP LAN on a label on the server.

IMPORTANT Make sure you obtain the MAC address to the iLO MP LAN and not the MAC address to the server core LAN. Step 2. Verify that an active LAN cable on the local subnet is connected to the iLO MP LAN port on the server. Step 3. Access a PC on the same physical subnet as the server. Step 4. Open a DOS window on the PC. Step 5. At the DOS prompt, enter arp -s to assign the IP address to the iLO MAC address. arp -s <IP address you assign to the MP MAC address> <MP MAC address>

Chapter 3

111

Installing the System Console Setup For example: arp -s 192.0.2.1 00-00-0c-07-ac-00 Step 6. At the DOS prompt, enter ping followed by the IP address to verify that the iLO MP LAN port is configured with the appropriate IP address. The destination address is the IP address that is mapped to the MP MAC address. Perform this task from the PC that has the ARP table entry. ping <IP address you assigned to the MP MAC address> For example: ping 192.0.2.1 Step 7. Connect to the iLO MP LAN using this IP address. Step 8. Use Web or telnet access to connect to the iLO MP from a host on the local subnet and finish setting up the LAN parameters (gateway and subnet).

Configuring the iLO MP LAN Using the RS-232 Serial Port

The following procedure shows how to configure the iLO MP LAN using the RS-232 serial port.

IMPORTANT Do not configure duplicate IP addresses on different servers within the same network. Duplicate server IP addresses conflict and the servers cannot connect to the network. The LC command enables you to configure an IP address, host name, subnet mask, and gateway address.

IMPORTANT Ensure you have a console connection through the RS-232 serial port or a network connection through the LAN to access the iLO MP and use the LC command. To assign a static IP address using the LC command, follow these steps: Step 1. Ensure the emulation software device is properly configured. The terminal emulation device runs software that interfaces with the server. The software emulates console output as it would appear on an ASCII terminal screen and displays it on a console device screen. Step 2. To ensure the emulation software is correctly configured, verify the following: a. Verify that the communication settings are configured as follows: 8/none (parity) 9600 baud None (receive) None (transmit)

b. Verify that the terminal type is configured appropriately. Supported terminal types are as follows: hpterm vt100 vt100+ vt-utf8

112

Chapter 3

Installing the System Console Setup

IMPORTANT Do not use hpterm and vt100 terminal types at the same time. There are many different emulation software applications. Consult the help section of your emulation software application for instructions on how to configure the software options. Step 3. Use Table 3-5 to determine the required connection components and the ports used to connect the server to the console device. Step 4. Connect the cables. a. Connect the DB-9 end of the RS-232 serial port female-to-female cable to the console RS-232 serial port. b. Connect the other end of the DB-9 female-to-female cable to the console device. Step 5. Start the emulation software on the console device. Step 6. Log in to the iLO MP. See Logging In to the iLO MP on page 114. Step 7. At the MP Main Menu, enter CM and press Enter to select command mode. Step 8. At the command mode prompt, enter LS and press Enter. The screen displays the default LAN configuration values. Write down the default values or log the information to a file for future troubleshooting. Step 9. Use the LC command to disable DHCP. a. From the LC command menu, type D and press Enter. b. Follow the instructions on the screen to change the DHCP status from Enabled to Disabled. c. Enter XD -R to reset the iLO MP. Step 10. Use the LC command to enter information for the IP address, host, subnet mask, gateway parameters, and so on. Step 11. Enter XD -R to reset the iLO MP. Step 12. After the iLO MP resets, log in to the iLO MP again and enter CM at the MP> prompt. Step 13. Enter LS to confirm that DHCP is disabled and display a list of updated LAN configuration settings.

Chapter 3

113

Installing the System Console Setup

Logging In to the iLO MP

To log in to the iLO MP, follow these steps: Step 1. Access the iLO MP using the LAN, RS-232 serial port, telnet, SSH, or Web method. The iLO MP login prompt displays. Step 2. Log in using the default the iLO MP user name and password (Admin/Admin). The MP Main Menu screen displays.

TIP

For security reasons, HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the initial login session. See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password on page 114.

Following is the MP Main Menu screen:

MP MAIN MENU: CO: Console VFP: Virtual Front Panel CM: Command Menu CL: Console Logs SL: Show Event Logs HE: Main Menu Help X: Exit Connection

This example shows the MP Main Menu accessed through the local serial port. The list of commands displayed on the screen can be different depending on the method of access to the iLO MP. When logging in using the local or remote RS-232 serial ports, the login prompt may not display if another user is logged in through these ports. Use Ctrl-B to access the MP Main Menu and the iLO MP prompt (MP>).

Additional Setup
This section provides additional information to help you set up the iLO MP. Modifying User Accounts and Default Password The iLO MP comes preconfigured with default factory settings, including a default user account and password. The two default user accounts at initial login are: All Rights (Administrator) level user: login = Admin password = Admin Console Rights (Operator) level user: login = Oper password = Oper

NOTE

User account and password are case sensitive.

IMPORTANT For security reasons, HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the initial login session. Make the following changes using any of the iLO MP user interfaces.

114

Chapter 3

Installing the System Console Setup To modify default account configuration settings, follow these steps: Step 1. Log in as the administrator. You must log in as the administrator in order to modify default user configuration settings. Step 2. To modify default passwords, follow these steps: a. Access the MP Main Menu. b. Enter CM at the MP> prompt. c. Enter UC at the MP:CM> prompt and follow the prompts to modify default passwords.

Step 3. To set up user accounts, follow these steps: a. Access the MP Main Menu. b. Enter CM at the MP> prompt. c. Enter UC at the MP:CM> prompt and follow the prompts to modify user accounts.

Setting Up Security For greater security and reliability, HP recommends that iLO MP management traffic be on a separate dedicated management network and that only administrators be granted access to that network. This not only improves performance by reducing traffic load across the main network, it also acts as the first line of defense against security attacks. A separate network enables administrators to physically control which servers are connected to the network. HP also strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the initial login session and determine the security access required and what user accounts and privileges are needed. Create local accounts or use directory services to control user access. See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password on page 114. Security Access Settings

CAUTION

When DHCP is enabled, the system is vulnerable to security risks because anyone can access the iLO MP until you change the default user name and password. HP strongly recommends you assign user groups and rights before proceeding.

Determine the security access required and user accounts and privileges needed. The iLO MP provides options to control user access. Select one of the following options to prevent unauthorized access to the iLO MP: Change the default user name and password. See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password on page 114. Create local accounts. You can store up to 19 user names and passwords to manage iLO MP access. This is ideal for small environments such as labs and small-to-medium sized businesses. Use directory services. Use the corporate directory to manage iLO MP user access. This is ideal for environments with a large number of frequently changing users. If you plan to use directory services, HP recommends leaving at least one local account enabled as an alternate method of access.

Chapter 3

115

Installing the System Accessing the Host Console

Accessing the Host Console

This section describes the different ways to access the host console of the server.

Accessing the Host Console With the TUI - CO Command

This section describes the steps to access the host console using the text user interface (TUI). To access the host console through the iLO MP, follow these steps: Step 1. Log in using your user account name and password at the login page. Step 2. At the iLO MP login prompt (MP>), enter the CO command to switch the console terminal from the MP Main Menu to mirrored/redirected console mode. All mirrored data is displayed. Step 3. To return to the iLO MP command interface, type Ctrl-B or Esc and + and press Enter.

Interacting with the iLO MP Using the Web GUI

Web browser access is an embedded feature of the iLO MP. The iLO MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port. It requires a separate LAN drop, IP address, and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system. Before starting this procedure, you must have the following information: DNS name for the iLO MP LAN Host name (used when messages are logged or printed)

To interact with the iLO MP through the Web GUI, follow these steps: Step 1. Open a Web browser and enter the DNS name for the iLO MP. The iLO MP login page opens.

Figure 3-50 Web Login Page

Step 2. Log in using your user account name and password at the login page.

116

Chapter 3

Installing the System Accessing the Host Console Step 3. Click Sign In. The Status Summary page displays after login.

Figure 3-51 Status Summary Page

Function Tabs Navigation Bar

Display Screen

Step 4. Select the Web interface functions by clicking the Function tabs at the top of the page. Each function lists options in the Navigation Bar on the left side of the page. Step 5. Click an option link to display data in the Display screen. Step 6. Click Refresh to update the display. The iLO MP Web interface has a robust help system. To launch iLO MP help, click the Help tab in the Display screen or click the question mark key (?) at the top right corner of each page to display help about that page.

Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA

IMPORTANT Onboard VGA graphics capability is not supported. You must install the A6150 graphics card to enable VGA grpahics support. See Enabling VGA Graphics Capability on page 118. The graphics capability of your HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server is not supported. The 15 pin VGA port on the back of your HP server is covered and does not function. DO NOT attempt to attach a monitor to this port. Because the graphics chip associated with this port is onboard the management processor card and cannot be turned off, you get an UNCLAIMED UNKNOWN message if you run the ioscan command. This is normal and can be ignored. Following is a screen shot of the ioscan screen:

Chapter 3

117

Installing the System Accessing the Host Console

root@myhost> ioscan -fH 0/7/2/0 Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ================================================================= unknown -1 0/7/2/0 UNCLAIMED UNKNOWN PCI Display (10025159) root@myhost>

Enabling VGA Graphics Capability To enable graphics capability on your HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server you must install the supported A6150B graphics PCI card kit in one of the open PCI slots. Installing Your A6150B Graphics Card If you ordered the A6150B graphics card kit for installation into a HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server, install the graphics card to activate graphics capability. Do not install the USB card; it is not supported. USB capability is already incorporated into your rp3410 or rp3440 server, and the USB ports are located on the rear panel. To install the A6150 graphics card, see Replacing a PCI or Graphics Card on page 204. Connecting a Monitor Using the VGA Port Use these procedures to connect a monitor to the VGA port on the rear of the server.

NOTE

You cannot access the iLO MP using VGA.

This method requires three elements: Monitor (with a VGA connector) Keyboard (with a USB connector) Mouse (with a USB connector)

IMPORTANT The server console output does not display on the console device screen until the server boots to the BCH Main Menu. Start a console session using the RS-232 serial port method to view console output before booting to the BCH Main Menu or to access the iLO MP. To access the graphic console with VGA, follow these steps: Step 1. Remove the VGA port cover on the rear of the server. Step 2. Connect the monitor, keyboard, and mouse cables. a. Connect the monitor VGA cable to the appropriate VGA port on the server. b. Connect the keyboard USB cable to the appropriate USB port on the server. c. Connect the mouse USB cable to the appropriate USB port on the server. Step 3. Power on the server. The BCH Main Menu prompt displays. The graphic console output displays on the monitor screen.

118

Chapter 3

Installing the System Powering the Server ON and OFF

Powering the Server ON and OFF

This section provides information and procedures for powering the server on and off.

Power States
The server has three power states: Standby power Full power Off

Plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle on the rear of the server to achieve the standby power state; the front panel power button is not turned on. Full power occurs when the power cord is plugged into the appropriate receptacle, and either the power is activated through the iLO MP PC command, or the power button is activated. In the off state, the power cords are not plugged in. Table 3-8 lists the server power states.

Table 3-8

Power States
Power Cable Plugged Into Receptacle? Yes Yes No Power Activated through the iLO MP PC Command; or Front Panel Power Button Activated? No Yes No Standby dc Voltage Applied? Yes Yes No dc Voltage Applied? No Yes No

Power States

Standby power Full power Off

NOTE

If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server.

Powering On the Server

Power on the server to full power using the following methods if the server is in the standby power state: iLO MP PC command Power button

Powering On the Server Using the iLO MP PC Command

NOTE

If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server.

To power on the server using the iLO MP PC command, follow these steps:

Chapter 3

119

Installing the System Powering the Server ON and OFF Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server. Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu. Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode. Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command. Step 5. Enter ON to power on the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action. Step 6. Start the operating system. Powering On the Server Manually

NOTE

If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO MP PR command, the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server.

To manually power on the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server. Step 2. Press the power button to start the server. Step 3. Start the operating system.

Powering Off the Server

Power off the server using the following methods if the server is in the standby or full power state: iLO MP PC command Power button

Powering Off the Server Using the iLO MP PC Command To power off the server using the iLO MP PC command, follow these steps: Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system. Step 2. Initiate a console session, and access the MP Main Menu. Step 3. Enter CM to enable command mode. Step 4. Enter PC to use the remote power control command. Step 5. Enter OFF to power off the server, and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action.

CAUTION

The main dc voltage is now removed from the server; however, ac voltage for standby power is still present in the server.

Step 6. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server. Powering Off the Server Manually To manually power off the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Gracefully shut down the operating system.

120

Chapter 3

Installing the System Booting the Operating System Step 2. Press the power button to power off the server.

CAUTION

The main dc voltage is now removed from the server; however, ac voltage for standby power is still present in the server.

Step 3. Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server.

Booting the Operating System

This section covers procedures for booting and shutting down an operating system on the server.

Supported Operating System

The only supported operating system on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers is HP-UX 11i Version 1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC servers.)

Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX

This section describes booting and shutting down HP-UX on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. To boot HP-UX, follow these steps: Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler on page 121 describes the standard way to boot HP-UX. Typically this results in booting HP-UX in multi-user mode. Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode on page 122 describes how to boot HP-UX in single-user mode. Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode on page 122 describes how to boot HP-UX in Logical Volume Management (LVM) maintenance mode. To shut down the HP-UX operating system, see Shutting Down HP-UX on page 122.

Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler To the autoboot function is enabled, the server boots to the installed operating system. If autoboot is not enabled, the server enters the boot console handler (BCH). The BCH enables you to control the servers booting environment. To set the boot path if HP-UX is at a path other than the primary path, follow these steps: To boot HP-UX, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> co. Step 2. From the COnfiguration Menu > prompt, enter pa pri xx/xx/xx. Step 3. From the COnfiguration Menu> prompt, enter ma. To boot HP-UX once you have set the primary path, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> bo pri. The following prompt displays: Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting (y/n)?

Chapter 3

121

Installing the System Booting the Operating System Step 2. Enter n.

NOTE

If the server fails to boot, you may be required to boot from a DVD that contains the operating system and other necessary software.

Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode To boot to HP-UX in single-user mode, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays: Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?> Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y. Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux-is. Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode To boot to HP-UX in LVM maintenance mode, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays: Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?> Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y. Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux-lm. Shutting Down HP-UX To shut down HP-UX running on a server, use the shutdown command. You have the following options when shutting down HP-UX: To shut down and reboot an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -r command. To shut down and halt (power off) an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -h command.

For details, see the shutdown (1M) manpage and follow these steps: Step 1. From the HP-UX command line, issue the shutdown command to shut down the HP-UX operating system. Step 2. Log in to HP-UX running on the server that you want to shut down. You should log in to the iLO MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the server console. Accessing the console through the iLO MP enables you to maintain console access to the server after HP-UX has shut down. Step 3. Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command-line options. The command-line options you specify dictate the way in which HP-UX shuts down, and whether the server is rebooted. Use the following list to choose an HP-UX shutdown option for the server: To shut down HP-UX and halt (power off) the server, issue the shutdown -h command. To reboot a halted server you must power on the server using the PC command at the iLO MP Command menu. To shut down HP-UX and reboot the server, issue the shutdown -r command.

122

Chapter 3

Installing the System Booting the Operating System

Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler

From the BCH Main Menu, enter in to go the INformation Menu. Use the corresponding command from the menu to verify the type and quantity of processors, memory, and I/O cards: Step 1. To enter the POSSE shell, type CO from the iLO MP Main Menu. To list all the categories available in the shell, type help . pr (Processors) me (Memory) io (Check the PCI device information to determine if the values match the devices installed in the server)

Step 2. Verify the parameters. Step 3. To return to the BCH Main Menu, use the ma command .

Chapter 3

123

Installing the System Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
This section provides basic server troubleshooting information. It is designed to help you diagnose common issues that can occur during server installation.

Troubleshooting Methodology
The server was tested prior to shipping. Failures encountered during installation can be due to damage that occurred in transit. Reseating connectors can clear problems that result from rough handling. If you are installing components or assemblies, compatibility problems or incorrect installations can be the cause of the problems. If you are installing components or assemblies, check that items are correctly installed and that all connectors are fully engaged. If the unit does not power on, check the power source before proceeding. If a problem is encountered during initial operation, remove any add-in or optional components and retest the server before continuing. Verify basic server operation before installing additional cards and configuring software and hardware for the server requirements. Troubleshooting is based on observation of server status indications and error messages, and by checking the SEL. You can observe the LED indicators on the front and rear of the server. Error messages are displayed on local and remote consoles. System history (console, event, and history logs) is available through the iLO MP, and is accessed through the console. Offline troubleshooting programs are available on the resource CD that is shipped with the server. To troubleshoot the server, you must be familiar with the Offline Diagnostics Environment (ODE) which runs from BCH. Descriptions and user information about offline troubleshooting tools are available on the Web at: http://www.docs.hp.com. The offline tools are available for downloading at: http://www.software.hp.com.

Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button

The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held in, and on what the server is doing when the button is pressed. You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the server. Table 3-9 describes what happens when the server is at BCH, and you press the power button.

Table 3-9

Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and at BCH

Action Reaction System power turns off immediately (hard power off) System power turns off immediately (hard power off)

One to three seconds Five seconds or longer

124

Chapter 3

Installing the System Troubleshooting Table 3-10 describes what happens when the server is on with the operating system running, and you press the power button.

Table 3-10
Action

Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and OS is Running

Reaction System power turns off (software controlled power off) System power turns off immediately (hard power off)

One to three seconds Five seconds or longer

If the server is off, and power is not connected to server power supplies, pressing the power button has no effect. If the server is off, and power is connected to server power supplies, the front panel power LED blinks at a 1 Hz rate. In this state, standby power is available to server circuits, but main power is off. Table 3-11 describes what happens when the server is off, and you press the power button.

Table 3-11
Action

Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off

Reaction System power turns on

One to three seconds

Server Does Not Power On

The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held, and on what the server is doing when the button is pressed. You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the server.

NOTE

If the server is off, and power is not connected to server power supplies, pressing the power button has no effect.

Power problems during installation are usually related to the installation process. If the server does not power on, check the LED indicators on the power supply rear panels and follow these steps. If the ac power LED on the power supply on the rear panel of the server is lit, power is available to the server. If the ac power LED is not lit, the server is either in standby power mode, or there is a problem. Reseat the power supply. If the problem persists, remove and reseat the board within the server. If the problem persists, replace the power supply or the power supply interface board. If the console shows that the server is powered on, but server LEDs indicate that power is off, remove and reseat connectors on the LED status board. If the problem persists, replace the LED status board. If the console shows that the server is not powered on (server is off), remove and reseat connectors on the system board. If the problem persists, replace the power supply interface board, or the system board.

Operating System Does Not Boot

If the operating system does not boot, but you are able to reach the BCH from either the main disk partition or the CD, use the following tools to help solve the problem: Check the system logs and analyze any error messages.

Chapter 3

125

Installing the System Troubleshooting Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE)

Operating System Boots with Problems

If the operating system is running and you are experiencing problems, use the following tools to help solve the problem: LEDs Error Messages and event logs

Intermittent Server Problems

You can usually trace intermittent problems that occur during installation to power source problems, a loose connector, or some other hardware problem. If you are experiencing intermittent problems, follow these steps: 1. Check iLO MP logs and analyze the problem. Determine if there is more than one symptom and if the problem is random. 2. Verify that the ac power source is stable. 3. Reseat all rear panel connectors. 4. Reseat all hot-swappable fans and power supplies. 5. Reseat all main memory DIMMs. 6. Reseat all cable harnesses and board connectors.

DVD Problems
DVD problems that occur during installation are usually related to faulty connections. If you are experiencing DVD problems, follow these steps: 1. Remove and reinsert the disk. 2. Replace the disk. 3. Remove and reinstall the DVD drive. Check that connectors are fully engaged. 4. Replace the DVD drive.

Hard Drive Problems

Hard drive problems that occur during installation are usually due to rough handling. The drive may not be correctly seated or may have been damaged in transit. If you are experiencing hard drive problems, follow these steps: 1. Remove and reinsert the faulty hard drive. 2. Swap the hard drive with one from another slot or with a known good spare. 3. Remove and reinstall the hard drive backplane. Check that connectors are fully engaged. 4. Replace the hard drive backplane.

Console Problems
Console problems during installations can be caused by faulty interconnections. If you are experiencing monitor, keyboard, or mouse problems, follow these steps:

126

Chapter 3

Installing the System Troubleshooting 1. Check the monitor controls. Adjust contrast and brightness as required. 2. Inspect all power and interconnecting cables. Check that all console connectors are fully engaged. 3. Check that all iLO MP board connectors are fully engaged. 4. Exercise the appropriate self-test features of the console software.

Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware

HP makes every effort to provide you with the most current version of firmware. However, there can be instances when this is not the case. To ensure you have the latest version of the firmware running on the server, download the latest version of the firmware from the Web, and create a CD to install the firmware on the server. Downloading the Latest Version of the Firmware To download the latest version of the firmware from the Web, follow these steps: Step 1. Go to: http://www.hp.com/go/bizsupport Step 2. Select download drivers and software. Step 3. Select Itanium-based servers from the Server category. Step 4. Select your product from the servers listed. Step 5. Select the operating system. Step 6. Select the firmware package you want to download. Step 7. Download the firmware package, and follow the instructions for updating the firmware included in the release notes. Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware on the Server To install the latest version of the firmware on the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Initiate a server console session. Step 2. Insert the CD with the copy of the latest version of the firmware. Step 3. Using the BCH Main Menu, boot to the drive that contains the CD with the updated firmware. Step 4. Follow the instructions to update the firmware.

Troubleshooting Using LED Indicators

If you suspect a hardware failure during installation, the system LEDs help you identify the problem. Front control panel LEDs provide system and subassembly status information that assist in identifying failing items. The following sections describe these LEDs. Front Control Panel LEDs The front control panel LEDs show the system status at a glance. Figure 3-52 and Table 3-12 show the front control panel LED and definitions.

Chapter 3

127

Installing the System Troubleshooting

Figure 3-52

Control Panel LEDs and Buttons

Locator Button and LED Diagnostics LEDs (Disabled) LAN LED System LED Power Button Power On/Off LED

LAN System

Table 3-12
LED/ Button System System System

Front Control Panel LED Definitions

State Running Booting Attention Flash Rate Steady Flashing at 0.5 Hz Flashing at 1 Hz Color Green Green Yellow Description System normalOS up and running OS booting or at BCH Warning: System needs attention. Redundancy lost, component failure pending. (Additional information can be found in the System Log) Hard fault, system halted System off Power normal Housekeeping voltage present Power off Disk activity

System System Power Power Power Disk LED

Fault Off On On Off

Flashing at 2 Hz Off Steady Flashing at 1 Hz Off Flashing at rate of disk activity

Red N/A Green Yellow Off Green

Thermal LED Thermal LED Locator LED/button

OK Warning

Steady Flashing at 1 Hz Flashing at 1 Hz

Green Yellow Blue

Thermal OK Thermal warning System locator LED can be remotely or locally activated/deactivated

128

Chapter 3

Installing the System Troubleshooting

Chapter 3

129

Installing the System Troubleshooting

Information to Collect Before You Contact Support

Before you contact HP support, you should: Step 1. Check information on troubleshooting and attempt to solve the problem. Note failure symptoms and error indications (LEDs and messages) by checking the SEL. Try to determine precisely what did or did not happen.

Step 2. Collect the following information: The model number of the server (for example, HP 9000 rp3440) The product number of the server. This is found on the identification label, which is found at the front of the unit (typically A9956A, A9951A, and so on). The serial number of the server. This is found on the identification label.

Step 3. Become familiar with the server configuration: Are you using the LAN, RS232, or Web interface to monitor the server? How many processors, DIMMs, and PCI cards have been installed? What versions of processor, memory, and PCI cards are used and where are they installed? What accessories are installed?

Step 4. Determine the following: Which firmware versions are in use? When did the problem start? Have recent changes been made to the system? Which operating system and version is in use?

130

Chapter 3

4 Booting the Operating System

This chapter describes procedures for booting and shutting down the HP-UX operating system on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. This chapter addresses the following topics: Supported Operating System on page 131 Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX on page 132 Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler on page 134

Supported Operating System

Booting the server loads the operating system, which is essential for running all other programs. You can only run one operating system on the server at one time. The HP-UX 11i version 1 (and higher HP-UX versions that support PA-RISC systems) is supported on the server.

NOTE

HP-UX is the only supported operating system for single-core processors.

You can find information about the HP-UX operating system on the Web at: Server Hardware Information: http://docs.hp.com/hpux/hw/ Diagnostics and Event Monitoring: Hardware Support Tools Complete information about HPs hardware support tools, including online and offline diagnostics and event monitoring tools, is at the http://docs.hp.com/hpux/diag/ Web site. This site has manuals, tutorials, FAQs, and other reference material. Books about HP-UX Published by Prentice Hall The http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/ Web site lists the HP books that Prentice Hall currently publishes, such as HP-UX books including: HP-UX 11i System Administration Handbook http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130600814.html HP-UX Virtual Partitions http://www.hp.com/hpbooks/prentice/ptr_0130352128.html

HP Books are available worldwide through bookstores, online booksellers, and office and computer stores.

Chapter 4

131

Booting the Operating System Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX

Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX

This section describes booting and shutting down HP-UX on the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. To boot HP-UX, follow one of these procedures: Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler on page 132describes the standard way to boot HP-UX. Typically this results in booting HP-UX in multi-user mode. Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode on page 133 describes how to boot HP-UX in single-user mode. Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode on page 133 describes how to boot HP-UX in Logical Volume Management (LVM) maintenance mode. To shut down the HP-UX operating system, see Shutting Down HP-UX on page 133.

Standard HP-UX Booting Using Boot Console Handler

To the autoboot function is enabled, the server boots to the installed operating system. If autoboot is not enabled, the server enters the boot console handler (BCH). The BCH enables you to control the servers booting environment. To set the boot path if HP-UX is at a path other than the primary path, follow these steps: To boot HP-UX, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> co. Step 2. From the COnfiguration Menu > prompt, enter pa pri xx/xx/xx. Step 3. From the COnfiguration Menu> prompt, enter ma. To boot HP-UX once you have set the primary path, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter Menu> bo pri. The following prompt displays: Do you wish to stop at the ISL prompt prior to booting (y/n)? Step 2. Enter n.

NOTE

If the server fails to boot, you may be required to boot from a DVD that contains the operating system and other necessary software.

132

Chapter 4

Booting the Operating System Booting and Shutting Down HP-UX

Booting HP-UX in Single-User Mode

To boot to HP-UX in single-user mode, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays: Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?> Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y. Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux -is.

Booting HP-UX in LVM Maintenance Mode

To boot to HP-UX in LVM maintenance mode, follow these steps: Step 1. At the BCH Main Menu, enter command or menu> bo pri. The following message displays: Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?> Step 2. To interact with IPL, answer y. Step 3. At the ISL> prompt, type hpux -lm.

Shutting Down HP-UX

To shut down HP-UX running on a system, use the shutdown command. You have the following options when shutting down HP-UX: To shut down and reboot an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -r command. To shut down and halt (power off) an HP-UX system, use the shutdown -h command.

For details, see the shutdown (1M) manpage and follow these steps: Step 1. From the HP-UX command line, issue the shutdown command to shut down the HP-UX operating system. Step 2. Log in to HP-UX running on the system that you want to shut down. You should log in to the iLO MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console. Accessing the console through the iLO MP enables you to maintain console access to the server after HP-UX has shut down. Step 3. Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command-line options. The command-line options you specify dictate the way in which HP-UX shuts down, and whether the server is rebooted. Use the following list to choose an HP-UX shutdown option for the server: To shut down HP-UX and halt (power off) the server, issue the shutdown -h command. To reboot a halted server you must power on the server using the PC command at the iLO MP Command menu. To shut down HP-UX and reboot the server, issue the shutdown -r command.

Chapter 4

133

Booting the Operating System Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler

Verifying the Server Configuration Using Boot Console Handler

From the BCH Main Menu, enter in to go the INformation Menu. Use the corresponding command from the menu to verify the type and quantity of processors, memory, and I/O cards: Step 1. To enter the POSSE shell, type CO from the iLO MP Main Menu. To list all the categories available in the shell, type help . pr (Processors) me (Memory) io (Check the PCI device information to determine if the values match the devices installed in the server)

Step 2. Verify the parameters. Step 3. To return to the BCH Main Menu, use the ma command .

134

Chapter 4

5 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides troubleshooting instructions for maintaining your HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server. This chapter addresses the following topics: Troubleshooting Methodology on page 135 Troubleshooting System Power on page 136 Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools on page 137 Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools on page 140 Identifying and Diagnosing Hardware Problems on page 141 Troubleshooting Using LEDs on page 141 Cleaning Procedures on page 145

Troubleshooting Methodology
WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before working with the server. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Do not operate the server for more than five minutes with any cover (including disk drives) removed. If you are hot-swapping a fan, reinstall the cover within five minutes to prevent overheating. Damage to system components can result due to improper cooling airflow.

To troubleshoot the server with online diagnostic tools, you must be familiar with the HP-UX operating system. You should also be familiar with the Offline Diagnostics Environment (ODE) which runs from BCH. Install both online and offline troubleshooting programs on your system before trouble is suspected. Descriptions and user information about offline troubleshooting tools are available on the Web at: http://docs.hp.com. Use the online diagnostic tools if you can boot your system. Online troubleshooting programs area available on the HP-UX operating system CD. If you can not boot your system, run the offline troubleshooting tool from the ODE CD that ships with your server. ODE CDs are platform-specific for PA-RISC servers.

Chapter 5

135

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting System Power

Troubleshooting System Power

This section provides information and procedures for troubleshooting the system power.

Using the Front Panel Power Button

The server power button on the front panel operates differently, depending on how long the button is held in and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed. You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the system. Table 5-1 shows the power button functions.

Table 5-1

Power Button Functions

Switch Pressed Time One second or less More than one second Less than one second More than one second but less than five seconds More than five seconds System power on No effect No effect Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers Hard shutdown Result

System State Power connected to power supplies, system power off System at ISL

System at BCH

Less than one second More than one second but less than five seconds More than five seconds

Hard shutdown Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers Hard shutdown

Power on, OS shut down

Less than one second More than one second but less than five seconds More than five seconds

No effect Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers Hard shutdown

OS running

Less than one second More than one second but less than five seconds More than five seconds

No effect Not used. This selection initiates E-buzzer functions that are not supported in the servers Hard shutdown

Operating System Does Boot

If your operating system is running and you are experiencing problems, use the following online tools to help solve your problem: (See Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools on page 137.) Support Tools Manager (STM) Event Monitoring Service (EMS) iLO MP

136

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools

Operating System Does Not Boot

If your operating system will not boot, but you are able to reach the BCH (from either the main disk partition or CD), use the following offline tools to help solve your problem: (See Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools on page 140.) Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE) iLO MP

Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools

The following online support tools are available from the HP-UX environment.

Support Tools Manager

Support Tools Manager (STM) is available in three user interfaces: Graphical interface for X-based terminals (XSTM) Menu interface for ASCII terminals (MSTM) Command line interface for all ASCII terminals (CSTM)

You can use the graphical and menu interfaces intuitively and you can use the command line interface to drive STM using scripts. You can use diagnostics to thoroughly test a device and isolate failures down to the suspected self-repair unit. For complete documentation on how to access and use STM go to: http://docs.hp.com. Under the Topics menu go to Diagnostics and look for Support Tools Manager.

Event Monitoring Service

Event Monitoring Service (EMS) is the framework for monitoring hardware and reporting events. You can use EMS to eliminate most undetected hardware failures that cause data loss or interruptions of system operation. You can monitor a hardware device (such as a disk) for the occurrence of any unusual activity (called an event). When an event occurs, it is reported by a variety of notification methods, such as e-mail. Event detections are handled automatically with minimal involvement on your part. The following monitors are available: CMC monitor UPS monitor FC hub monitor FC switch monitor Peripheral status monitor Memory monitor

Chapter 5

137

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools EMS comes with your HP-UX operating system. To bring up the event monitoring Main Menu, execute the following command at the shell prompt:
/etc/opt/resmon/lbin/monconfig

From the list of Main Menu selections, select:

(E) Enable Monitoring

iLO MP
For complete information on the iLO MP see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide on the Web. The following information provides iLO MP troubleshooting steps. Accessing the iLO MP Interface and System Logs To access the iLO MP interface and system logs, follow these steps: Step 1. Access the iLO MP interface (press Ctrl+B). Step 2. Log in with proper user name and password. Step 3. Enter cl to display the console logs. This log displays console history from oldest to newest. Step 4. Enter sl to display the system logs. The system logs consist of: SEL Step 1. Access the iLO MP command prompt. Step 2. Enter the sl command. The Event Log Viewer menu displays:
SL Event Log Viewer Menu: Log Name Entries % Full Latest Timestamped Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------E - System Event 39 3 % 01 Nov 2004 17:15:03 F - Forward Progress 1307 32 % B - Current Boot 299 99 % P - Previous Boot 0 C - Clear All Logs L - Live Events Enter menu item or [Ctrl-B] to Quit:

System event log Forward progress log Current boot log Previous boot log Live events log

Step 3. Enter e to review the events. The Event Log Navigation menu displays:

138

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Online Support Tools

Log Name Entries % Full Latest Timestamped Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------E - System Event 39 3 % 01 Nov 2004 17:15:03 Event Log Navigation Help:

+ <CR> D F L J H K T A U ? Q Ctrl-B

View next block (forward in time, e.g. from 3 to 4) View previous block (backward in time, e.g. from 3 to 2) Continue to the next or previous block Dump the entire log for capture and analysis First entry Last entry Jump to entry number View mode configuration - hex View mode configuration - keyword View mode configuration - text Alert Level Filter options Alert Level Unfiltered Display this Help menu Quit and return to the Event Log Viewer Menu Exit command and return to the MP Main Menu

Step 4. Enter t to select text mode. Step 5. Enter d to dump the log to the screen. (If desired, save this file for reference.) Step 6. To decode the blinking state of the system LED, review the entire SEL and look at events with alert level 3 and above. For example:
Log Entry 24: 14 Feb 2003 15:27:02 Alert Level 3: Warning Keyword: Type-02 1b0800 1771520 Hot Swap Cage: SCSI cable removed Logged by: BMC; Sensor: Cable / Interconnect - SCSI ChExt Cable

Data1: Device Removed/Device Absent 0x203E4D0AC6020220 FFFF0008F61B0300

Log Entry 73: 00:00:12 Alert Level 3: Warning Keyword: Type-02 050301 328449 The server's built-in sensors have detected an open chassis door. Logged by: BMC; Sensor: Physical Security - Chassis Open

Data1: State Asserted 0x200000000C020570 FFFF010302050300

Chapter 5

139

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

Troubleshooting Using Offline Support Tools

Use the ODE CD to troubleshoot your HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server by accessing the offline diagnostic environment (ODE).

Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE)

Use ODE to evaluate specific hardware components using a command line interface. To access ODE from your ODE CD, follow these steps: Step 1. Power on the server and insert the ODE CD. Step 2. Boot the system to the PDC prompt (BOOTADMIN, BCH, and so on). PDC prompts can differ on some computer models.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu>

Step 3. List the bootable devices by entering search: search Step 4. Select the CD device that contains the ODE CD, for example:
p3

Step 5. Boot from that device by entering boot p3: boot p3 Step 6. You are asked to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) prompt. Enter yes: y Step 7. From the ISL prompt, start the Offline Diagnostics Environment by entering ODE: ODE Table 5-2 lists the ODE commands that are available at the ODE prompt.

Table 5-2
Command help help <command> help <var> ls <module_name>

ODE Commands
Description Displays a list and description of the available commands Displays the additional information Displays the additional information Lists the ODE modules that will run on your computer Runs an ODE module interactively Runs an ODE module non-interactively

run <module_name>

140

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting Identifying and Diagnosing Hardware Problems

Identifying and Diagnosing Hardware Problems

Should a hardware failure occur, the system LED and the SEL will help you identify the problem: LEDs. The lights on the front bezel of the server change color and blink in different patterns to help identify specific hardware problems. LEDs on the rear panel of the server display LAN status. The SEL provides detailed information about the errors identified by the LEDs. Use the iLO MP to view the SEL.

Troubleshooting Using LEDs

If you suspect a hardware failure, the power and system LEDs, located on the front control panel, will help you identify the problem. The following sections describe their functions. Additional LEDs are provided on the system board (See System Board LEDs on page 144). You may want to back up your data or replace a component before it fails. The boot process is monitored by the iLO MP. With the current iLO MP functionality, the four diagnostic LEDs are disabled (always off). You can monitor server operation from a console using the iLO MP. Figure 5-1 shows the control panel LEDs.

Figure 5-1

Control Panel LEDs

Locator Button and LED Diagnostics LEDs (Disabled) LAN LED Power Button Power On/Off LED

System LED

LAN System

Power and System LEDs

The power and system LEDs indicate the state of the system. When the system LED is blinking yellow or red, a problem exists. Table 5-3 lists the system LED states.

Table 5-3

System LED States

State ac power off if power LED is off. Running OS.

System LED Off Solid green

Chapter 5

141

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using LEDs

Table 5-3

System LED States (Continued)

State Booting or running BCH. Attention: Alerts of levels 3-5 detected in the iLO MP logs The LED will turn off once the event log has been read.

System LED Blinking green Blinking yellow (1/sec.)

Blinking red (2/sec.)

Fault: System Alert 7 detected, LED will blink until the problem is resolved and the system boots successfully Fatal hardware error detected by BMC, LED will blink until problem is corrected.

For system alerts of levels 3-5, you clear the attention condition on the LED by accessing the logs using the SL command available in the iLO MP command mode. The fault condition for system alerts of level 7 is cleared by resolving the problem and cycling power. See the SL error logs for additional error information.

NOTE

Always check the iLO MP status logs in the case of a blinking yellow or red system LED before replacing any hardware.

LAN LEDs
The front panel LAN LED indicates the system is communicating over the Gigabit: Blinking green: The system is communicating over the LAN; the LAN is active. Not green: No LAN cable attached; LAN network dead or the system is off or LAN link is established; no current LAN activity.

Table 5-4 lists the 10/100/1000 base-T Ethernet LAN connectors LEDs.

Table 5-4
LED 1000BT 100BT 10BT Activity On On On

10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet LAN Connector LEDs

Status Green Green Green Green Color Description The 1000 MHz with Ethernet protocol and twisted-pair wiring is enabled; off: no link The 100 MHz with Ethernet protocol and twisted-pair wiring is enabled; off: no link The 10 MHz with Ethernet protocol and twisted-pair wiring is enabled; off: no link LAN activity

Blinking

142

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using LEDs Four iLO MP card LAN LEDs are also on the rear panel: Table 5-5 lists the iLO MP card LAN LEDs.

Table 5-5
LAN LED Self-test

iLO MP Card LAN LEDs

Location Top Yellow Off Color State iLO MP running selftest or error iLO MP has booted 10BT link established 10BT activity No link or 100BT link 100BT link established 100BT activity No link or 10BT link Standby power on Standby power off

10BT

2nd from top

Green Blinking green Off

100BT

2nd from bottom

Green Blinking green Off

Standby power

Bottom

Green Off

Chapter 5

143

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using LEDs

System Board LEDs

There are two additional LEDs that can help when troubleshooting the system. These LEDs are located on the system board close to the back of the system and are viewed through the small cooling holes in the system case.

Figure 5-2

Location of the STBY and BMC LEDs

F/W LED (Disabled) BMC LED

STBY

The STBY LED can be viewed here through the cooling vents

The BMC LED can be viewed here through the cooling vents

144

Chapter 5

Troubleshooting Cleaning Procedures

Table 5-6 lists the system board LEDs.

Table 5-6
LED STBY

System Board LEDs

Description This standby LED comes on as soon as the systems power cord is plugged in. If this light is off when you plug it in, reseat the power supply, and if this does not work, replace the power supply. A few seconds after the system is plugged in this LED starts blinking, which means that the BMC is active.

BMC

Cleaning Procedures
This section provides information on how to clean the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

IMPORTANT Power off the server when cleaning it. Table 5-7 provides instructions on how to clean the server.

Table 5-7
Component Keyboard Monitor screen Mouse

Cleaning
Time Frame Regularly Regularly Regularly Six Months Cleaning Procedure Dust with damp, lint-free cloth. Use the HP Video Screen Cleaning Solution found in 92193M Master Clean Kit. See the mouse's manual for mouse maintenance procedures. Check functions of cooling fans and clean the intake openings on the chassis of dust, lint, and other obstructions to airflow.

Cooling fans and grills

CAUTION

DO NOT use petroleum-based cleaners (such as lighter fluid) or cleaners containing benzene, trichlorethylene, ammonia, dilute ammonia, or acetone. These chemicals could damage all plastic and painted surfaces.

Chapter 5

145

Troubleshooting Cleaning Procedures

146

Chapter 5

6 Removing and Replacing Components

This chapter describes how to remove and replace hardware in HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing these procedures. Voltages can be present within the server. Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge. This chapter addresses the following topics: Safety Information on page 147 Required Service Tools on page 148 Location of Internal Components and Connectors on page 149 Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151 Removing and Replacing System Fans on page 161 Removing and Replacing the Power Supply on page 163 Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive on page 166 Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides on page 170 Removing and Replacing System Memory on page 177 Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module on page 183 Removing and Replacing the System Battery on page 198 Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage on page 200 Removing and Replacing PCI Cards on page 202 Removing and Replacing the PCI Backplane on page 205 Removing and Replacing a Removable Media Drive on page 207 Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card on page 209 Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery on page 211 Removing and Replacing the LED Status Panel on page 213 Removing and Replacing the System Board on page 214 Replacing the Resident System Board with a Replacement System Board on page 221 Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module on page 223 Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane on page 227

Safety Information
Follow the procedures listed below to ensure safe handling of components and to prevent personal injury and to prevent damage to the server: If removing or installing a hot-swap or hot-plug item, follow the instructions provided in this guide. If installing a hot-swappable item when power is applied (fans are running), reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating.

Chapter 6

147

Removing and Replacing Components Required Service Tools If installing an assembly that is not hot-swappable, disconnect the power cables from the server external power connectors.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before working with the server. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items. Do not wear clothing subject to static charge build-up, such as wool or synthetic materials. If installing an internal assembly, wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat, such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-1155). Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only. Do not touch any metal-edge connectors or any electrical components on accessory boards.

Required Service Tools

Service of this product may require one or more of the following tools: Electrically Conductive Field Service Kit (HP part number 9300-1155) 1/4 inch flat blade screwdriver ACX-15 Torx screwdriver Special processor tool kit (HP part number 5069-5441)

148

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Location of Internal Components and Connectors

Location of Internal Components and Connectors

Figure 6-1 shows the internal physical layout of the server.

Figure 6-1

Internal Physical Layout

1 Pwr 1 14 Pwr 2

3 4 Fan 1B Fan 1A

13 5

12 11 Fan 3 10 9 Fan 2 Drive 3 Drive 2 Drive 1 8 7 PS 1

PS 2 6

Table 6-1 provides the key to Figure 6-1.

Table 6-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Component Locations
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Hot-pluggable hard disk drives (up to 3) Hard disk drive System fans (Fan 2 center, Fan 3 PCI card cage) Intrusion switch Memory sockets PCI card cage iLO MP card

Power receptacles (PWR1 left, PWR2 right) Memory airflow guide Processor airflow guide System fans (Fan 1A right, Fan 1B left) Slimline optical drive Power supplies 1 center, power supply 2 under optical drive) Status panel board

Chapter 6

149

Removing and Replacing Components Location of Internal Components and Connectors Figure 6-2 shows the system board connectors and slots.

Figure 6-2

System Board Connectors and Slots

21 22 23 1 2

20

SCSI CH A SCSI CH B 3

19

18

4 5

17

16 7 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Table 6-2 provides the key to Figure 6-2.

Table 6-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connector Locations
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Power supply fan connector Power module power connector HP ZX1 memory and I/O controller (under heatsink) Memory sockets Status panel connector Power module auxiliary connector SCSI backplane power connector PCI/memory fan cable connector 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PCI backplane connector Optical drive connector iLO MP card connector HP ZX1 I/O adapter Serial ports (2) (factory use only) USB connectors (4) LAN connector

External SCSI connector SCSI connectors A & B CPU power pods CPU 1 CPU 0 Turbo fan power connectors Five VRM cards Battery

150

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel

Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel

To upgrade, remove, or replace most server components, you must first remove the server covers from the chassis. This section explains how to remove and replace the server covers and bezel for rack-mount and pedestal-mount configurations.

WARNING

Do not remove the server cover without first turning the server off and unplugging the power cord from the outlet or power protection device unless you are only replacing a hot-swappable fan. Always replace the cover before turning the server on.

Accessing a Rack-Mount Server

HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers are designed to be rack mounted. The following procedure explains how to gain access to a server that is mounted in an approved rack. For slide installation instructions, see the Installation Guide, Mid-Weight Slide Kit (HP part number 5065-7291).

WARNING

Ensure that all anti-tip features (front and rear anti-tip feet installed; adequate ballast properly placed, etc.) are employed before extending the server.

To access the internal components on a rack-mounted server, pull the server out onto the rail guides and remove the top cover. Extend the Server from the Rack

NOTE

Ensure that there is enough area (approximately 1.5 meters [4.5 ft.]) to fully extend the server out the front to work on it.

To extend the server from the rack, follow these steps:

NOTE

If you are replacing a hot-swappable item, you can leave the server on and external cables (including the power cord) connected.

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect the power and external cables from the back of the server.

Chapter 6

151

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel Step 2. Release the rack latches by rotating them outward.

Figure 6-3 Release the Rack Latches

Step 3. Slide the server out of the rack until the guide-rail release clips are visible. Insert the Server into the Rack To insert the server into the rack, follow these steps: Step 1. Press the rail clips on either side of the server inward and push the server into the rack until it stops. Step 2. Verify that the rack latches are closed. Removing and Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server Removing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

NOTE

If you are replacing a hot-swappable item, you can leave the server on and external cables (including the power cord) connected.

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect the power and external cables from the back of the server.

152

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel Step 2. Ensure the top cover lock keyswitch is in the unlocked position. Rotate the blue release lever toward the back of the server and slide the cover toward the back of the server.

Figure 6-4 Removing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

Step 3. Lift the top cover off the server chassis. Replacing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

CAUTION

Secure any wires or cables in your server so they will not get cut or interfere with the replacement of the top cover.

Chapter 6

153

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel Step 1. Align the front edge of the top cover with the alignment mark on the optical drive bay.

Figure 6-5 Aligning the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

To replace cover, align front edge here then slide forward

Step 2. Grasp the blue release lever and slide the cover toward the front of the server until the lever snaps into place.

Figure 6-6 Closing the Top Cover on a Rack-Mounted Server

Step 3. Slide the server into the rack enclosure and reconnect the power and external cables.

154

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel on a Rack-Mounted Server You must remove the front bezel from the chassis to gain access to the power supplies and optical drive. Removing the Front Bezel Step 1. Press in on the retaining clips located on the right-side of the front panel.

Figure 6-7 Front Bezel Retaining Clip

Step 2. Rotate the front panel outward and lift it off the server chassis. Replacing the Front Bezel Step 1. Insert the bezel latches into the matching slots on the server chassis.

Chapter 6

155

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel Step 2. Close the bezel and push toward the front of the server until it locks into place.

Figure 6-8 Replacing the Front Bezel on a Rack-Mounted Server

Accessing Pedestal-Mount Server

Both the HP 9000 rp3410 and the rp3440 servers are available in a pedestal configuration or can be converted from a rack to a pedestal configuration. To access the internal components on a pedestal server, you must remove the side and top covers. Removing the Side Covers on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

NOTE

If you are replacing a hot-swappable item, you can leave the server on and external cables (including the power cord) connected.

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect the power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the side cover. a. Grasp both indentations at the top of the side panel and pull outward.

156

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel b. Lift the side cover off of the server chassis.

Figure 6-9 Removing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Step 3. Remove the top cover.

Figure 6-10 Removing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

a. Turn the top cover lock keyswitch to the unlocked position. b. Rotate the blue release handle to release the latch.

Chapter 6

157

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel c. Slide the top cover toward the back of the chassis and lift it off.

CAUTION

The server depends on the access panels being closed for proper cooling of internal components. Operating the server with the side cover removed can cause the server to quickly overheat.

Replacing the Top and Side Covers on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

CAUTION

Secure any wires or cables in your server so they do not get cut or interfere with the replacement of the cover.

Step 4. Replace the top cover: a. Align the front edge of the top cover with the alignment mark on the optical drive bay.

Figure 6-11 Top Cover Alignment Mark

To replace cover, align front edge here then slide forward

158

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel b. Place the top cover on the chassis and slide it toward the front of the server until the blue release lever snaps in place.

Figure 6-12 Replacing the Top Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Step 5. Replace the side cover: a. Align the side covers mounting holes with the matching tabs on the server chassis. b. Close the side cover until it snaps onto the server chassis.

Figure 6-13 Replacing the Side Cover on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Chapter 6

159

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server You must remove the front bezel from the chassis to gain access to the power supplies and optical drive. Removing the Front Bezel To remove the front bezel, follow these steps: Step 1. Use the indentation at the top edge of the bezel to pull the bezel away from the chassis and to a 45 degree angle. Figure 6-14 Removing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server

Step 2. Lift the bezel off the mounting tabs and away from the chassis.

160

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Fans Replacing the Front Bezel on a Pedestal-Mounted Server To replace the front bezel, follow these steps: Step 1. Position the bezel at an approximate 45 degree angle and align the retaining slots at the bottom with the retaining tabs on the chassis. Press the bezel against the chassis to engage the tabs.

Figure 6-15 Aligning the Pedestal Front Bezel

Step 2. Rotate the bezel against the chassis so that it snaps into place.

Removing and Replacing System Fans

There are four system fans to keep the server cool when it is running. The system fans are hot-swappable, enabling you to replace a fan while the server is running.

CAUTION

When the server is running, the top cover must be replaced within five minutes to prevent components from overheating.

Removing a System Fan

Step 1. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 2. Remove the fan.

Chapter 6

161

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Fans a. To remove fan 1A, 1B, 2 or 3 from a rack-mounted server, or fan 3 from a pedestal server, grasp the appropriate fan and lift it out of the fan socket (Figure 6-16; Figure 6-17; Figure 6-18).

Figure 6-16 Fan 1A or Fan 1B Removal

Fan 1A

Fan 1B

Figure 6-17 Fan 2 Removal

Fan 2

162

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply

Figure 6-18 Fan 3 Removal

Fan 3

Replacing a System Fan

Step 1. Grasp the replacement fan module and insert it into its fan socket. Step 2. For fans 1A, 1B, or 2, connect the fan power connector.

CAUTION

Replace the top cover within five minutes to prevent damage to the server components.

Step 3. Replace the top cover. Step 4. Use the PS command of the iLO MP to verify fan operation.

Removing and Replacing the Power Supply

The power supplies in the server are hot-swappable; that is, if one power supply stops working or exhibits voltage problems, the remaining supply can support the server until the failed unit is replaced. A power supply can be removed and replaced without turning off the server on servers that contain two power supplies.

CAUTION

Before removing a power supply, make sure the second power supply functions properly. The two green LEDs inside the supply must both be lit on the second supply before the failed power supply can be safely removed.

Chapter 6

163

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply

Removing the Power Supply

To remove the power supply, follow these steps: Step 1. Remove the front bezel from the server. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 2. Press the power supply retaining clip to unlatch the power supply release lever.

Figure 6-19 Releasing the Power Supply Retaining Clip

Power Supply 2 Power Supply 1

164

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Step 3. Press the power supply release lever down and slide the power supply out of the server.

Figure 6-20 Removing the Power Supply

Replacing the Power Supply

To replace the power supply, follow these steps: Step 1. Open the power supply release lever and slide the power supply into place.

Figure 6-21 Replacing the Power Supply

Chapter 6

165

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive Step 2. Push in on the power supply release lever to lock the retaining clip in place (Figure 6-21). Step 3. Replace the front bezel. Step 4. Verify that both power supply LEDs are lit. Step 5. Use the PS command of the iLO MP to verify power supply operation.

Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

The HP 9000 rp3410 or rp3440 server can support up to three hot-pluggable, Low-Voltage Differential (LVD) hard disk drives. These hard disk drives are 3.5-inch form factor devices that connect to Ultra 160 Wide LVD SCSI interfaces on the disk cage backplane. There is a significant difference between the terms hot-swappable and hot-pluggable: Hot-swapping happens at the device level; that is, a hot-swappable device manages insertion or removal on its own without assistance from operating system commands. The hot-plug process enables you to replace a defective disk drive in a high-availability server while it is running.

CAUTION

The disk drives in HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers are not hot-swappable; they are merely hot-pluggable. A manual software procedure must be done in order to safely remove or insert disk drives while the server is running. To avoid damage to the hard drives: See the documentation provided with the drive for additional details on inserting or removing a disk drive. See your OS documentation for instructions on preparing the OS for inserting or removing a hard drive.

Removing a Hard Disk Drive

To remove a hard disk drive, follow these steps: Step 1. If the server is powered on and the OS is running, prepare the OS to have the disk drive removed. (See your OS documentation for instructions on preparing the OS for removing and inserting hard drives.) Step 2. If you have locked your hard drives, you must unlock them before removing or replacing a drive:

CAUTION

When the server is running, the metal cover must be replaced within five minutes to prevent components from overheating.

a. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) b. Press down on the UNLOCK lever to unlock the drive (Figure 6-22).

166

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

CAUTION

If you try to remove a hard disk drive without unlocking it from the server, you will damage the hard drive bay.

Figure 6-22 Unlocking the Disk Drive

Step 3. Squeeze inward on the colored release clip on the hard drive release lever.

Figure 6-23 Releasing the Disk Drive

Chapter 6

167

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive Step 4. Pull outward on the release lever to remove the drive from the server (Figure 6-23; Figure 6-24).

Figure 6-24 Removing the Disk Drive

Replacing a Hard Disk Drive

To install or replace a hard disk drive, follow these steps: Step 1. If the server is powered on and the OS is running, prepare the OS to have the disk drive removed. (See your OS documentation for instructions on preparing the OS for removing and inserting hard drives.) Step 2. If you are locking the hard drive in place, remove the cover.

CAUTION

Replace the top cover within five minutes to prevent damage to the server components.

168

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing an Internal Hard Disk Drive Step 3. If a disk drive slot filler is installed, remove the slot filler by pulling it from the disk drive slot.

Figure 6-25 Removing Disk Drive Slot Filler

Step 4. Insert the hard disk drive into the drive bay from which you removed the drive and push inward on the release lever until the drive no longer slides forward. You must leave the release lever in the open position, as shown, when you push the drive into the server.

Chapter 6

169

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides Step 5. Push in on the release lever to secure the drive in the bay and to ensure that the drive connector is seated properly.

Figure 6-26 Hard Disk Drive Installation

Step 6. Lock the hard drives in place by press down on the LOCK lever. Replace the server cover if it was removed to unlock drives. Step 7. Verify the drive replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the ODE to exercise the newly installed module.

Step 8. Reset the server to the BCH Service Menu to rescan the hard drives.

Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides

To upgrade, remove, or replace most server components, you must first remove the covers from the server chassis. The server has the following airflow guides: The processor airflow guide ensures that the proper volume of air for cooling the processor module power pods, processor modules, and voltage regulator modules flows over these components.

170

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides You must remove the processor airflow guide: If it is damaged to the point that airflow across the dual processor modules is restricted. To access components under the airflow guide.

The memory airflow guide ensures that the proper volume of air flows over the memory DIMMs to cool them. You must remove the memory airflow guide: If it is damaged to the point that airflow across the memory DIMMs is restricted. To access memory DIMMs and sockets.

NOTE

Air flows through the server from front to back.

Figure 6-27

Airflow Guides Locations

Processor Airflow Guide Front Portion of Processor Airflow Guide

Memory Airflow Guide

Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide

Removing the Memory Airflow Guide Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.)

Chapter 6

171

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides Step 3. Grasp the memory airflow guide and lift it out of the server.

Figure 6-28 Removing the Memory Airflow Guide

Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide Step 1. Align the guides on both sides of the airflow guide with the slots on the chassis. Step 2. Insert the memory airflow guide in the slots. Step 3. Replace the cover. Step 4. Reconnect power and external cables.

Removing and Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide

Removing the Processor Airflow Guide Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the server cover. Step 3. Remove the IDE cable and power module cables from the processor airflow guide cable clips. Step 4. Remove the main portion of the airflow guide: a. Hold the guide using the opening on top of the guide.

172

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides b. At the same time, grasp the back end of the airflow guide and lift the guide out of the server.

Figure 6-29 Removing the Processor Airflow Guide

Step 5. Remove the front portion of the airflow guide: a. Remove system fans 1A and 1B. (See Removing a System Fan on page 161.) b. Remove the memory airflow guide. (See Removing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.)

Chapter 6

173

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides c. Rotate the clip clockwise to release the latch.

Figure 6-30 Open the Release Clip

d. Disconnect the power cable connected to the guide from the system board by squeezing the clip.

174

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides e. Lift the front portion of the processor airflow guide out of the server.

Figure 6-31 Remove the Front Portion of the Processor Airflow Guide

Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide Step 1. Replace the front portion of the airflow guide: a. Align the release latch of the front half of the airflow guide over the release latch post and snap it in place. b. Connect the power connector on the front portion of the guide to the connector on the system board. Step 2. Replace system fans 1A and 1B. (See Replacing a System Fan on page 163.) Step 3. Route the processor turbo fan power cables through the processor heatsink posts so that the cables will not be pinched between the heatsink posts and the processor airflow guide (Figure 6-32).

Chapter 6

175

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing Airflow Guides

CAUTION

Turbo fan power cables can be damaged if pinched between the heatsink posts and the processor airflow guide. Ensure that the cables are below the top surface of the heatsink posts before installing the processor airflow guide.

Figure 6-32 Routing Power Cables through Heatsink Posts

Step 4. Replace the main portion of the airflow guide: a. Hold the opening on top of the processor airflow guide. b. At the same time, grasp the back end of the airflow guide and insert the airflow guide into the server. c. Connect the power module cable. d. Place the power and IDE cables in the cable clips. e. Insert the two airflow guide retaining tabs into the two slots on the front half of the airflow guide. Step 5. Replace the memory airflow guide. (See Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.) Step 6. Replace the top cover. Step 7. Reconnect power and external cables.

176

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Memory

Removing and Replacing System Memory

The server has 12 memory sockets for installing DDR SDRAM memory modules. The server supports the following combinations For rp3410 - from 512 MB up to 6 GB. For rp3440 - from 1 GB up to 32 GB.

System memory DIMMs are located on the system board.

Supported DIMM Sizes

Supported DIMM sizes are as follows: 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB (HP 9000 rp3440 only). If 4 GB DIMMs are used, only one configuration (8 X 4 GB in the first eight sockets) is supported.

Chapter 6

177

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Memory Figure 6-33 shows the DIMM slot identification.

Figure 6-33

DIMM Slot Identification

Rear

Pair 6 (5A & 5B) Pair 4 (3A & 3B) Pair 2 (1A & 1B)

Cell 1

1B 5B

1A 3A 3B 5A

Cell 0

0B

2B 4B 0

4A

2A Quad 1 = Pair 1 & Pair 2 Quad 2 = Pair 3 & Pair 4

Pair 1 (0A & 0B) Pair 3 (2A & 2B) Pair 5 (4A & 4B)

Front

Quad 3 = Pair 5 & Pair 6

rp3410 Memory Configuration

The HP 9000 rp3410 supports DDR SDRAM DIMMs with ECC and chip spare protection. This server has 12 DIMM slots and supports a maximum of 6 GB of total system memory. Memory usage in the rp3410 server varies with the model designation. In the original server (model A7136A), memory is installed as one or two pairs in the first quad (group of four). This enables memory configurations of two, four, eight, or twelve DIMMs. In the current server (model A7136B), memory must be installed as quads. This enables memory configurations of four, eight, or twelve DIMMs. Thus, the HP 9000 rp3410 server must include a minimum of 512 MB (model A7136A) or 1 GB (model A7136B) and can include up to 6 GB of memory in combinations of 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB DIMMs. Different size DIMMs can be installed in the server, but all four DIMMs in a quad must be identical.

178

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Memory Memory Loading Rules DIMMs must be installed in server load sequence (the first DIMM must be in the first slot, the second DIMM must be in the second slot, and so on). A minimum of 512 MB (2 x 256 MB DIMMs in a model A7136A server) or 1 GB (4 x 256 MB DIMMs in a model A7136B server) of memory must be installed in a HP 9000 rp3410 server. Maximum memory is 6 GB. A minimum of two DIMMs (one pair) is required in the model A7136A server. A minimum of four DIMMs (one quad) is required in the model A7136B server. All DIMMs within a quad must be identical.

rp3440 Memory Configuration

The HP 9000 rp3440 supports DDR SDRAM DIMMs with ECC and chip spare protection. This server has 12 DIMM slots, but maximum system memory is 32 GB due to cooling limitations. Memory must be installed as quads (group of four). This enables memory configurations of four, eight, or twelve DIMMs. Thus, the rp3440 server must include a minimum of 1 GB and can include up to 24 GB of memory in combinations of 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB DIMMs, or 32 GB of memory consisting of eight 4 GB DIMMs. Different size DIMMs can be installed in the server (except when 4 GB DIMMs are used), but all four DIMMs in a quad must be identical.

NOTE

There is only one configuration of 4 GP DIMMs that is supported: two (2) quads of 4 GP DIMMs. You cannot mix one quad of 4 GB DIMMs with any other quads.

Memory Loading Rules DIMMs must be installed in server load sequence (the first DIMM must be in the first slot, the second DIMM must be in the second slot, and so on). Minimum memory is 1 GB (4 x 256 MB). Maximum memory is 32 GB (8 x 4 GB installed in the first eight slotsthe remaining slots must remain empty if 4 GB DIMMs are installed). Memory DIMMs must be installed in groups of four (quads). All DIMMs within a quad must be identical.

The memory subsystem supports chip spare functionality. Chip spare enables an entire SDRAM chip on a DIMM to be bypassed (logically replaced) in the event that a multi-bit error is detected on that SDRAM. In order to use the chip spare functionality, only DIMMs built with x4 SDRAM parts are used, and these DIMMs must be loaded in quads (two DIMMs per memory cell, loaded in the same location in each memory cell).

System Firmware Requirements

If you are using 4 GB DIMMs in a HP 9000 rp3440 server, system firmware must be greater than revision 45.10. Use the BCH FV command, or the iLO MP SR command to display the system firmware revision status.

Chapter 6

179

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Memory

Replacing Deallocated Memory Ranks

This section provides the steps necessary to replace deallocated memory ranks.

NOTE

When replacing deallocated memory ranks on a server with system firmware version 45.11 or greater, you must perform the following procedure before replacing the deallocated memory. This procedures is necessary to ensure that the memory is properly reallocated upon server boot.

To ensure the repaired memory rank reallocates properly, follow these steps: Step 1. Boot to BCH. Step 2. Enter the in me command to view the deconfigured quad of memory. Step 3. Enter the ser pdt clear command. The following message displays followed by a 30 second delay: If DIMM replacement is necessary, power down the system now: Use ^B MP:CM> PC -OFF -NC, then pull power cord and replace DIMM. Otherwise, the system will automatically reboot in 30 seconds. Step 4. You must remove power from the system within 30 seconds. Step 5. See Removing System Memory and Installing System Memory for instructions on removing and replacing the memory DIMM.

Removing System Memory

WARNING Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing system memory. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.

To remove a DIMM, follow these steps: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide. (See Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.) Step 4. Identify the DIMM to be removed and push the appropriate extraction levers found on either side of the DIMM connector outward to the open position. The DIMM ejects from the connector.

180

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Memory Step 5. At the same time, push the appropriate extraction levers found on either side of the DIMM connector outward to the open position. The DIMM ejects from the connector. Step 6. Remove the DIMM from the socket. If the removed memory is functional, store it in a static-free container for future use.

Installing System Memory

Memory modules must be loaded in the correct order: In the HP 9000 rp3410 server, the first four DIMMs must be installed as ordered pairs of equal size. The DIMM in socket 0A must match the DIMM in socket 0B. If a second pair is added (sockets 1A and 1B), the DIMMs must match the DIMMs in sockets 0A and 0B. Additional DIMMs (DIMM sockets 5 through 12) must be installed as quads (identical groups of fourtwo matched pairs). This requirement is summarized as: 0A and 0B must be an identical pair 1A and 1B must be identical to the pair in sockets 0A and 0B 2A, 2B and 3A, 3B must be an identical quad (2 pairs) 4A, 4B and 5A, 5B must be an identical quad (2 pairs)

In the HP 9000 rp3440 server, DIMMs must be installed in matched quads. Two matched memory card pairs of equal size (that is, four identical DIMMs) must be installed, one pair per memory cell, as listed below: 0A, 0B and 1A, 1B must be an identical quad (2 pairs) 2A, 2B and 3A, 3B must be an identical quad (2 pairs) 4A, 4B and 5A, 5B must be an identical quad (2 pairs)

NOTE

DIMMs match if they have the same HP part number.

Module sizes can be mixed, as long as DIMMs in each quad match. For example: On HP 9000 rp3410 servers, it is acceptable to load four 256 MB DIMMs in sockets 0A, 0B, 1A, and 1B and four 512 MB or 1 GB DIMMs in sockets 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B On HP 9000 rp3440 servers, it is acceptable to load a quad of 256 MB DIMMs in sockets 0A, 0B, 1A and 1B, and a quad of larger DIMMs in sockets 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B

To install DIMMs, follow these steps: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables.

CAUTION

To ensure that memory modules are not damaged during removal or installation, power off the server and unplug the power cord from the ac power outlet. Wait until the LED on the back of the power supply turns off before removing or installing memory.

Step 2. Remove the top cover. Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide. (See Removing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.)

Chapter 6

181

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing System Memory Step 4. Holding the memory module by its left and right edges, insert the module into the socket. The memory modules are keyed and can only be inserted in one direction. When the module is correctly seated, the retainer clips will return to their fully upright position. Step 5. Firmly and evenly push down on each end of the DIMM until it seats in the socket. Ensure the extraction levers are in the closed position and snap the clips firmly into place to ensure that the DIMMs are seated properly.

Figure 6-34 Inserting DIMM into Connector

Step 6. Replace the memory airflow guide. (See Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.) Step 7. Replace the top cover. Step 8. Reconnect power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 9. Verify the memory replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the ODE to exercise the newly installed memory.

182

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module

Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module

This section provides information about installing dual processor modules. The modules are located on the system board which is accessible by removing the top cover.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a dual processor module. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic system behavior or system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider. Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.

NOTE

Processor tool kit (HP part number 5069-5441) is required for removal and installation of a dual processor module.

Removing a Dual Processor Module

To remove a dual processor module, follow these steps: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide and cables. (See Removing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.) Step 4. Remove the processor airflow guide and cables. (See Removing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 172.)

Chapter 6

183

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 5. Disconnect the power pod cable from the power connector on the system board

Figure 6-35 Disconnect Power Pod Cable

Step 6. Remove and retain the two power pod mounting screws.

Figure 6-36 Remove Power Pod Mounting Screws

184

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 7. Slide the power pod toward the rear of the system board so that the power pod connector disconnects from its connector on the dual processor module (Figure 6-37.

Figure 6-37 Disconnect Power Pod from Dual Processor Module

Chapter 6

185

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 8. Lift the power pod up and out of the chassis. Place the power pod into an antistatic container (Figure 6-38).

Figure 6-38 Remove Power Pod

186

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 9. Disconnect the turbo fan power cable.

Figure 6-39 Disconnect the Turbo Fan Cable

Step 10. Release the four heatsink captive screws on the module heat sink.

Figure 6-40 Release Heatsink Captive Screws

CPU Install Tool

Step 11. Slide the sequencing retainer plate toward the back of the server to open the hole in the edge of the heatsink for insertion of the special processor tool into the processor module locking mechanism.

Chapter 6

187

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 12. Unlock the dual processor module locking mechanism using the CPU install tool. Insert the tool into the hole that runs down through the edge of the turbo fan heatsink and rotate the special processor tool 180 degrees counterclockwise.

Figure 6-41 Unlocking the Dual Processor Module Locking Mechanism

CPU Install Tool (2.5 mm Driver or Allen Wrench)

188

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 13. Lift the dual processor module and the turbo fan assembly up and out of the chassis (Figure 6-42). If protective pin covers are available, install the cover on processor connectors to shield connector pins. Place the dual processor module in an antistatic container.

Figure 6-42 Removing the Dual Processor Module

Chapter 6

189

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module

Figure 6-43

Dual Processor Module Removal and Replacement

Power Pod # 2

Power Pod # 1

Dual Proc #1 (in Socket CPU0) Dual Proc #2 (in socket CPU1)

Installing a Dual Processor Module

Either one or two dual processor modules are located on the system board. Module #1 is located to the right of the system board and module #2 (when installed) is located on the left of the system board next to the bridge assembly. In a 1P/1C or 1P/2C configuration, the one dual processor module must be installed in the CPU0 socket. Each dual processor module has an associated power pod that is required. Install a dual processor module as follows: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. If you are replacing a dual processor module, remove the old module as described in the previous procedure.

190

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 4. Unlock the dual processor module locking mechanism using the CPU install tool. Insert the tool into the hole that runs down through the edge of the heatsink and rotate the special processor tool 180 degrees counterclockwise. Verify that the dual processor module socket locking mechanism is rotated into the unlocked position (Figure 6-44).

Figure 6-44 Unlocking the Dual Processor Module Locking Mechanism

CPU Install Tool (2.5 mm Driver or Allen Wrench) Step 5. Remove any protective packaging from the processor modules.

NOTE

Protective covers can be installed to protect connector pins. The covers can be saved for future use.

Chapter 6

191

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 6. Use the four locator posts on the heatsink and the turbo fan power cable to properly align the fan and dual processor module on the system board (Figure 6-45). The four locator posts will fit in locator holes on the system board processor module mount. The turbo fan power cable must be positioned so that it is located on the side of the heatsink that faces the front of the server.

Figure 6-45 Aligning the Dual Processor Module

192

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 7. Use the special processor tool to lock the dual processor module in place on the system board. To do this, insert the special processor tool into the hole that runs down the side of the heatsink and rotate it clockwise 180 degrees (Figure 6-46).

Figure 6-46 Locking the Dual Processor Module in Place

CPU Install Tool (2.5 mm Driver or Allen Wrench)

Step 8. Slide the sequencing retainer plate toward the front of the server. Step 9. Screw in the four heatsink captive screws in a criss-cross torquing pattern by alternately tightening the screws so as not to completely tighten one screw before the others.

Figure 6-47 Securing the Captive Screws

Torquing Pattern
1 4

CPU Install Tool

Chapter 6

193

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 10. If you are installing a second dual processor module in a server which contained only one dual processor module, remove the spacers from the power module mounting: (Figure 6-48.) a. Locate the two power module shims on the system board. b. Remove the holding screws that hold the shims in place. c. Remove the spacers from the holding screws. Discard the spacers. d. Retain the screws for use when installing the power module.

Figure 6-48 Power Module Shims

Screws Spacers Shims

194

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 11. Slide the power module on the system board metal mounting bracket so that the connector on the power module makes contact with its connector on the dual processor module.

Figure 6-49 Aligning the Processor Module Power Pod

Chapter 6

195

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 12. Align the two mounting screw holes on the power module with the screw holes in the shims on the system boards metal mounting bracket (Figure 6-49). Screw in the power module mounting screws (Figure 6-50). (Use the screws removed in step 10.)

Figure 6-50 Installing the Processor Module Power Pod Mounting Screws

CAUTION

Turbo fan power cables can be damaged if pinched between the heatsink posts and the processor airflow guide. Ensure the cables are below the top surface of the heatsink posts before installing the processor airflow guide by routing the cables through the heatsink posts (Figure 6-51).

196

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Dual Processor Module Step 13. Route the turbo fan power cables through the heatsink posts so the cables will not be pinched when the processor airflow guide is set in place (Figure 6-51).

Figure 6-51 Routing the Turbofan Power Cables through the Heatsink Posts

Step 14. Connect the turbo fan power cable to the system board. Step 15. Connect the power pod cable to the power connector on the system board.

Figure 6-52 Connecting the Power Pod Cable

Step 16. Replace the processor airflow guide. (See Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 175.) Step 17. Replace the memory airflow guide. (See Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 172.) Step 18. Replace the cover.

Chapter 6

197

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Battery Step 19. Verify processor replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use MAKODIAG provided by the ODE to exercise the newly installed processors.

Removing and Replacing the System Battery

The server has two batteries. The main system battery is located on the system board. The other batter is located on the underside of the iLO MP card. (See Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery on page 211.)

Battery Notice
This product contains a Lithium battery.

WARNING

Lithium batteries can explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of lithium batteries in a fire. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Replace only with the identical or equivalent battery. Follow the manufacturers recommendations. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.

Removing the System Battery

IMPORTANT Prior to removing the system battery, log the system settings such as LAN configuration settings, boot settings, and so on. Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Remove the memory airflow guide. (See Removing and Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171.) Step 4. Remove the processor airflow guide, the front portion of the processor airflow guide, and fans 1A and 1B. (See Removing and Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 172.) Step 5. Lift up on the battery retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the battery out of its socket (Figure 6-53).

198

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Battery

CAUTION

Only lift the battery high enough to clear the holder. Excessive stress on the battery holder retaining clip can damage the clip.

Figure 6-53 Removing the System Battery

Replacing the System Battery

Step 1. Lift up on the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the battery into the holder. The positive (+) terminal of the battery faces up.

CAUTION

Only lift the battery high enough to clear the holder. Excessive stress on the battery holder retaining clip can damage the clip.

Step 2. Replace the processor airflow guide. (See Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 175.) Step 3. Replace the memory airflow guide. (See Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 172.) Step 4. Replace the cover. Step 5. Reconnect power and external cables and turn on the server.

Chapter 6

199

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage Step 6. Verify the battery replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

Step 7. You must reset the system time and date using the BCH DATE command. Once you have set the time, turn the server off, unplug the power cord, and wait for a minute before turning it back on. Execute the DATE command again. If the time and date are now correct, you have installed the battery correctly. Step 8. Reset the LAN configuration settings, boot settings, or any other system settings.

Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage

PCI cards are installed in a removable PCI card cage. This section explains how to access the PCI card cage, as well as how to remove and install PCI cards.

Removing the PCI Card Cage

To remove the PCI card cage from the server, follow these steps:

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a PCI card cage. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Step 1. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 2. Disconnect cables from the PCI cards.

200

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage Step 3. Lift up on the PCI card cage release lever and the back edge of the PCI card cage and lift the PCI card cage out of the server (Figure 6-54).

Figure 6-54 Removing the PCI Card Cage

Chapter 6

201

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing PCI Cards Step 4. Grasp the PCI card cage cover and slide it away from the bulkhead end of the cage, then lift the cover off.

Figure 6-55 Removing the PCI Card Cage Cover

Step 5. The PCI cards are now accessible for removal and replacement. Step 6. Unscrew the bulkhead screw that holds the PCI card in place.

Replacing the PCI Card Cage

To replace the PCI card cage into the server, follow these steps: Step 1. Hold the cover in mounting position and slide it toward the bulkhead end of the cage. Step 2. Hold the PCI card cage above the chassis mounting position, such that the bulkhead end of the cage is toward the server rear panel. (See Figure 6-54.) Step 3. Hold the PCI card cage release lever in the raised position and lower the PCI card cage into the server chassis. Step 4. Press the PCI card cage release lever into the lowered position to lock the PCI card cage into the server chassis. Step 5. Reconnect the cables to the PCI card.

Removing and Replacing PCI Cards

The server can contain up to four PCI cards. PCI cards are located in the PCI card cage. The HP 9000 rp3410 provides two 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card sockets and the HP 9000 rp3440 server provides four 64-bit, 133 MHz PCI-X card sockets.

202

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing PCI Cards

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a PCI card. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server.

Carefully read the following information concerning PCI slot configuration. Inserting a PCI card into a slot that is not configured to accept it, can cause operation failure or the PCI card to operate at less than optimum speed. PCI slots are numbered 1 through 4. See the labels on the rear panel of the chassis for correct PCI slot number identification.

Removing a PCI or Graphics Card

To remove a PCI card from the server, follow these steps:

CAUTION

Record the location of all PCI cards as they are installed. Depending on the operating system, replacing the PCI card in a different location might cause boot failure.

Step 1. Remove the PCI card cage. (See Removing the PCI Card Cage on page 200.) Step 2. Disconnect any cables that are connected to the PCI card. Step 3. Unscrew the bulkhead screw and remove the card holder (if necessary) to enable insertion of the card. Step 4. Grasp the edges of the PCI card being removed and gently rock the card releasing the connector from the PCI backplane connector. Place the removed PCI card in an electrostatic container.

Chapter 6

203

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing PCI Cards Step 5. Install a PCI slot cover to close the cavity left by the removal of the PCI card (Figure 6-56). This will maintain the proper airflow within the chassis.

Figure 6-56 Installing a PCI Slot Cover

Replacing a PCI or Graphics Card

Step 1. Remove the PCI card cage. (See Removing the PCI Card Cage on page 200.) Step 2. Grasp the edges of the PCI card to be installed and gently press the card into the PCI backplane connector.

Figure 6-57 Installing a PCI Card

204

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the PCI Backplane Step 3. Install and tighten the bulkhead screw to hold the PCI card in place. Step 4. Connect any cables that are required by the PCI card. Step 5. Replace the PCI card cage. (See Replacing the PCI Card Cage on page 202.) Step 6. Replace the top cover. Step 7. Verify the PCI card replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

Removing and Replacing the PCI Backplane

The HP 9000 rp 3410 and rp3440 server system backplane is called the PCI backplane and provides four PCI card sockets. The removal process is the same for both.

Removing the PCI Backplane

Step 1. Remove the PCI card cage from the server. (See Removing the PCI Card Cage on page 200.) Step 2. Remove all PCI and graphics cards. (See Removing a PCI or Graphics Card on page 203.) Step 3. Unscrew the backplane mounting screws and slide the backplane board toward the bulkhead end of the PCI card cage. This unlocks the backplane from its standoffs.

Chapter 6

205

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the PCI Backplane Step 4. Lift the backplane over the top of the standoffs and slide it out of the cage (Figure 6-58).

Figure 6-58 Removing the PCI Backplane

Replacing the PCI Backplane

Step 1. Place the backplane in the cage by aligning the cage standoffs with the holes on the backplane and slide it into place.

206

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Removable Media Drive Step 2. Secure the PCI backplane by screwing in its mounting screws.

Figure 6-59 Replacing the PCI Backplane

Step 3. Replace any PCI and graphics cards. (See Replacing a PCI or Graphics Card on page 204.) Step 4. Replace the PCI card cage. (See Replacing the PCI Card Cage on page 202.) Step 5. Verify the backplane replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

Removing and Replacing a Removable Media Drive

The removable media drive is located behind the front bezel.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a removable media drive. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Chapter 6

207

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing a Removable Media Drive

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server. Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic server behavior or system failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

Removing a Removable Media Drive

To remove a removable media drive, follow these steps: Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Disconnect the IDE cable from the back of the drive. Step 4. Grasp the front of the drive and squeeze in on the locking tabs to release the drive. Step 5. Pull the drive straight out to remove it from the chassis.

Figure 6-60 Removable Media Drive Removal and Replacement

Replacing a Removable Media Drive

To replace the removable media drive, follow these steps: Step 1. If a removable media drive has not previously been installed in the server, the drive slot is covered with a DVD drive filler. Remove the DVD drive filler.

208

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Step 2. Slide the replacement drive into the drive bay until it stops sliding and the retaining clips on both sides of the drive snap into place. Step 3. Connect the IDE cable on the back of the drive. Step 4. Replace the top cover. Step 5. Reconnect the power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 6. Verify the drive replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation. Use diagnostics provided by the ODE to exercise the newly installed module.

Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card

The iLO MP offers remote server management through an independent iLO MP.

Removing the iLO MP Card

Step 1. Power off the server and use the MPs LS command to display network settings for the iLO MP. Record these network settings because you will need to input the settings when a new iLO MP card is installed. Step 2. Disconnect all power and external cables. Step 3. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.)

Chapter 6

209

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Step 4. Unscrew the two mounting screws that connect the iLO MP card to the internal chassis post and the two external mounting screws that are located on both sides of the 25-pin serial connector.

Figure 6-61 Removing the iLO MP card

Step 5. Disconnect the iLO MP card connector. Step 6. Remove the iLO MP card from the server by grasping it by its edges (Figure 6-61).

Replacing the iLO MP card

Step 1. Insert the iLO MP card in the server by grasping its edges and placing it on the two iLO MP card posts. Step 2. Push the 10/100 management LAN, 15-pin VGA and 25-pin serial connectors through their openings on the back of the server. Step 3. Connect the iLO MP card: Connect the iLO MP card cable to its connector on the system board Insert and tighten the two mounting screws that connect the iLO MP card to the internal chassis post Insert and tighten the two external mounting screws that are located on both sides of the 25-pin serial connector

Step 4. Replace the top cover. Step 5. Reconnect power and external cables. (Do not turn on the server at this time.)

210

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery Step 6. If you have installed a new iLO MP card, use the iLO MP commands to configure the server for operation. Enter the network settings recorded during iLO MP card removal (if available). Step 7. Verify the card replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

Step 8. Turn on the server.

Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery

Systems have a second battery that might need replacement. The iLO MP card battery is located on the underside of the iLO MP card.

Battery Notice
This product contains a Lithium battery (HP part number 1420-0356).

WARNING

Lithium batteries can explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of lithium batteries in a fire. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Replace only with the identical or equivalent battery. Follow the manufacturers recommendations. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.

Removing the iLO MP Card Battery

Step 1. Remove the iLO MP card. (See Removing the iLO MP Card on page 209.) Step 2. Locate the iLO MP card battery on the bottom of the card. (See Figure 6-62.) Step 3. Lift up on the battery retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the battery out of its socket.

Chapter 6

211

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery

CAUTION

Only lift the battery high enough to clear the holder. Excessive stress on the battery holder retaining clip can damage the clip.

Figure 6-62 Removing the iLO MP Card Battery

Replacing the iLO MP Card Battery

Step 1. Lift up on the battery holder retaining clip with a flat-head screwdriver and slide the battery into the holder. The positive (+) terminal of the battery faces up.

CAUTION

Only lift the battery high enough to clear the holder. Excessive stress on the battery holder retaining clip can damage the clip.

Step 2. Replace the iLO MP card. (See Replacing the iLO MP card on page 210.) Step 3. Verify the battery replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

212

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the LED Status Panel

Removing and Replacing the LED Status Panel

The LED status panel card contains the server and diagnostic LEDs.

Removing the LED Status Panel

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect all power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Disconnect the LED status panels controller cable. Step 4. Unscrew the two LED status panel mounting screws and remove the panel.

Figure 6-63 Removing the LED Status Panel

Replacing the LED Status Panel

Step 1. Replace the LED status panel in the server and screw in the two LED status panel mounting screws. Step 2. Connect the LED status panel controller cable. Step 3. Replace the top cover. Step 4. Reconnect all power and external cables. Step 5. Turn on the server and verify that the server and power LEDs light up.

Chapter 6

213

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board

Removing and Replacing the System Board

Server information is stored on the system board. If you are installing a new system board, you must write serial number and model string information to the system board after installation.

Removing the System Board

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect all power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Remove these components from the system board: System fans. (See Removing a System Fan on page 161) PCI card cage. (See Removing the PCI Card Cage on page 200) Memory airflow guide. (See Removing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 171) Processor airflow guide. (See Removing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 172) Memory (DIMMs). (See Removing System Memory on page 180) Dual processor modules. (See Removing a Dual Processor Module on page 183) iLO MP card. (See Removing the iLO MP Card on page 209)

Step 4. Remove the mechanical covers that are covering the VGA and DB9 ports.

Figure 6-64 Remove Mechanical Covers

214

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board Step 5. Unscrew the six backplane system board mounting screws that connect the system board to the rear of the server chassis.

Figure 6-65 Remove Backplane System Board Mounting Screws

Step 6. Disconnect the ac power cable connectors. Step 7. Disconnect all cables that are connected to the system board. To help with re-assembly, make note of which cables were connected to which connector. Step 8. Lift the fan bridge to access the three power cables near the PCI card cage. Step 9. Unscrew the system board mounting screw. A screw symbol is adjacent to the mounting screw.

Figure 6-66 Remove the System Board Mounting Screw

Step 10. Remove the system board: a. Grasp the memory controller chip heatsink and the processor module heatsink and slide the system board toward the front of the server. This releases the system board from its chassis standoffs.

Chapter 6

215

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board b. Lift up the processor module side of the system board and slide it free of the PCI card cage bay.

Figure 6-67 Remove the System Board

216

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board

Replacing the System Board

Step 1. Grasp the new system board by its edges and carefully align it in the server: a. Angle the board to enable the PCI connector to slide into the PCI card cage bay area. b. Align the system board keyholes with their standoffs on the chassis. c. Slide the PCI connector posts on the system board into their slots on the server chassis.

Figure 6-68 Align the System Board PCI Connector

Chapter 6

217

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board Step 2. Slide the system board back toward the rear of the server to secure the system board on its standoffs.

Figure 6-69 Slide System Board in Chassis

Step 3. Screw in the system board mounting screw. Step 4. Connect all cables to their appropriate connectors on the system board. Step 5. Screw in the six rear backplane system board mounting screws.

Figure 6-70 Installing the Rear Panel Mounting Screws

218

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board Step 6. Replace the mechanical covers over the VGA and DB9 ports.

Figure 6-71 Replacing Mechanical Covers

Step 7. Replace the power connectors in their slots on the back of the server and screw in the power connector mounting screws.

Figure 6-72 Reinstalling the Power Connectors

Step 8. Replace the following server components: iLO MP card. (See Replacing the iLO MP card on page 210) Dual processor modules. (See Installing a Dual Processor Module on page 190) Memory DIMMs. (See Installing System Memory on page 181) Processor airflow guide. (See Replacing the Processor Airflow Guide on page 175) Memory airflow guide. (See Replacing the Memory Airflow Guide on page 172) PCI card cage. (See Removing the PCI Card Cage on page 200) System fans. (See Replacing a System Fan on page 163)

Chapter 6

219

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the System Board Step 9. Replace the top cover. Step 10. Reconnect all power and external cables and turn on the server. Step 11. If you have installed a new system board, you must write the serial number and model string data to the new system board. To write the server information to the new system board, follow these steps: a. Locate the system serial number and note it for use in the following steps. The system serial number is found in two places: On the left of the front bezel, but to the right of the disk drives, locate the pull tab and extend the tab from the server to display product information. A label containing the system serial number is attached to the pull tab. (Figure 6-73 on page 222) A label containing the system serial number is located on the right side of the chassis, as you face the server.

b. Monitor server startup on a terminal. At the BCH prompt, enter the SER command to call up the service menu. (See the Utilities chapter for additional information about BCH.) c. At the service menu prompt, enter the INIT command to enter original product number and system serial number. d. When prompted to change, enter the product number that is on the pull tab and confirm by entering Y when prompted. e. When prompted, enter the system serial number. f. When prompted, enter Y to confirm the change.

NOTE

If your product is a base system that is one processor 800mhz CPU, skip steps g-j and go to step k to reset the server.

g. Enter the upgrade command at the service menu prompt. You will be asked for the system serial number. h. Enter the same system serial number as you previously entered from the pull-out tag. i. Enter the key from the key certificate that is on the back of the pull-out tag. The key certificate number must be the number that applies to this system serial number or all the system components will not be fontanel. A current system value displays (rp3410 dc--) with the upgraded system value (the original value). The following prompt displays: Do you wish to continue with the change? j. Enter Y to continue with the change. k. Enter the RESET command to reset the server with the changes in effect.

NOTE

If you performed an upgrade, the certificate shows a new key and model number to be used

Step 12. Verify the system board replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.)

220

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Replacing the Resident System Board with a Replacement System Board Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

Replacing the Resident System Board with a Replacement System Board

All A7136B, A9948A, and A9949A products within the documented serial number ranges were shipped from the factory with an incorrect system setting product number.

CAUTION

A7137-69001, HP 9000 rp34x0, changing to your system settings. If this procedure is not performed correctly, you will not be able to set your server up without the help of an HP Customer Engineer.

Affected Serial Numbers: USL0804515 - USE4444KD3 SG40909239 - SG44719451 JPA0409004 - JPA0444016 DE40900020 - DE44700079

For the life of the affected systems, the factory programmed value must be maintained when entering the system product number instead of the value on the system pull-out tag. Failure to do so can cause licensed customer applications to fail. Affected Product Numbers: For the following product numbers, A7137A must be used when entering the system setting product number, as detailed in step 5 of the following procedure: A9948A - rp3440-1 Way 800 MHz Solution A9949A - rp3440-1 Way 1 GHz Solution A7136A must be used when entering the system setting product number for the A7136B - rp3410-1 Way Base server 800MHz Solution, as detailed in step 5 of the following procedure.

WARNING

Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server before removing or replacing a removable system drive. Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an ac power source is connected. This voltage is present even when the main power switch is in the off position. Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment.

Chapter 6

221

Removing and Replacing Components Replacing the Resident System Board with a Replacement System Board

CAUTION

Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure. Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server. Failure to properly complete the steps in this procedure will result in erratic server behavior or server failure. For assistance with this procedure contact your local HP Authorized Service Provider.

Before replacing the resident system board with the replacement system board (A7136-69001), you must locate the pull-out tag that is on the chassis of your server. This provides you with the system product number, system serial number, and key certificate number that you need to set up the system board.

Figure 6-73

System Product Number, System Serial Number, Key Certificate

Replacing a System Board

You must perform the following procedure to ensure all components in the server are functional. To replace the system board, follow these steps: Step 1. Remove the system board. (See Removing the System Board on page 214.) Step 2. Replace the system board with the replacement system board. (See Replacing the System Board on page 217.) Step 3. Power the system on. Step 4. At the BCH prompt, enter the SER command. This puts you into the service menu. Step 5. At the service menu prompt, enter the INIT command.

NOTE

The INIT command only works on the repair board.

222

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module Step 6. When prompted, enter the product number located on the pull-out tag. Confirm by answering Y when asked. If you made a mistake entering the product number, you can answer N and re-enter the product number when asked. Step 7. Enter the system serial number when prompted. If you accidentally hit return without entering the system serial number, you will have a default value. Confirm the original serial number by entering Y when asked. If you made a mistake entering the serial number, you can answer N and re-enter the serial number when asked. Step 8. If your product is a one processor 800MHz CPU, skip steps 9-12 and go to step 13 to reset your server. Step 9. At the service menu prompt, enter upgrade. The system will ask you for the system serial number. Step 10. Enter the system serial number from the pull-out tag. Step 11. Enter the key from the key certificate that is on the back side of the pull-out tag. The key certificate number and system serial number are a pair and must be used together. If you do not enter the correct key certificate number, the server components will not be functional. Step 12. The screen displays the current system value (rp3410 dc--) and the original upgraded system value. You will be prompted with the question Do you wish to continue with this change? Answer Y to confirm the change. Step 13. Enter reset to reboot the server. perform the resetting with the changes in effect. Step 14. Perform the resetting with the changes in effect.

CAUTION

If this procedure is not followed, the server components will not be functional.

Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module

The Power Supply Interface (PSI) module supports up to two redundant power supplies.

Removing the Power Supply Interface Module

Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect all power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Remove the system board. (See Removing the System Board on page 214.)

Chapter 6

223

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module Step 4. Lift the power cables out of their metal holding clips.

Figure 6-74 Power Cables and Holding Clips

224

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module Step 5. Unscrew the PSI mounting screw and remove the PSI module from the server.

Figure 6-75 Remove the Mounting Screw

Figure 6-76 Remove the PSI Interface Module

Chapter 6

225

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module

Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module

Step 1. Place the PSI module into the chassis by sliding the module retaining tab into the socket on the hard disk drive bay wall.

Figure 6-77 Replacing the Power Supply Interface Module

Step 2. Screw in the PSI module mounting screw and secure the power cables behind the holding clips.

Figure 6-78 Securing the Power Supply Interface Module and Cables

Step 3. Replace the system board. (See Replacing the System Board on page 217.)

226

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane Step 4. Replace the top cover. Step 5. Reconnect all power and external cables. Step 6. Verify the PSI replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane

Removing the Hard Drive Disk SCSI Backplane
Step 1. Power off the server and disconnect all power and external cables. Step 2. Remove the top cover. (See Removing and Replacing Server Covers and Bezel on page 151.) Step 3. Lift up on the PCI card cage release lever and the back edge of the PCI card cage and lift the PCI card cage out of the server. (See Removing and Replacing the PCI Card Cage on page 200.) Step 4. Remove fans 2 and 3. (See Removing and Replacing System Fans on page 161.) Step 5. Lift up on the fan power bridge and disconnect the backplane power cable.

Figure 6-79 Open the Fan Power Bridge

Chapter 6

227

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane Step 6. Disconnect the SCSI cables and unscrew the backplane mounting screws.

Figure 6-80 Disconnect SCSI Cables

Figure 6-81 Remove Mounting Screws

228

Chapter 6

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane Step 7. Remove the hard drive backplane by sliding it in the direction of the arrow and pulling it outward from its standoff posts.

Figure 6-82 Remove the SCSI Backplane

Figure 6-83 Remove the SCSI Backplane from Chassis

Chapter 6

229

Removing and Replacing Components Removing and Replacing the Hard Disk Drive (SCSI) Backplane

Replacing the Hard Disk Drive SCSI Backplane

Step 1. Insert the hard drive backplane onto its four chassis standoffs and slide it to the left as you face it. This locks the hard drive backplane in place. Step 2. Screw in the two backplane mounting screws and connect the two SCSI cables. Step 3. Connect the backplane power cable and lower the fan power bridge until it snaps in place. Step 4. Replace fans 2 and 3. (See Removing and Replacing System Fans on page 161.) Step 5. Replace the PCI card cage. (See Replacing the PCI Card Cage on page 202.) Step 6. Replace the top cover. Step 7. Reconnect all power and external cables. Step 8. Verify the backplane replacement and operation by using the system utilities. (See the Utilities chapter or the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide for additional information.) Use the iLO MP commands to verify operation. Use the BCH commands to verify operation.

230

Chapter 6

A Replacement Parts
This appendix provides a replacement parts list that contains the following customer self-repair part information for the server: Manufacturing Part Number Description Replacement Part Number, if applicable Exchange Part Number, if applicable

This appendix addresses the following topics: Parts Illustrations on page 232 Customer Self Repair on page 234 Replaceable Parts List on page 236

Appendix A

231

Replacement Parts Parts Illustrations

Parts Illustrations
Figure A-1 provides parts identification illustrations. See the replaceable parts list to identify part numbers.

NOTE

The parts displayed in Figure A-1 do not represent all the parts in the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Figure A-1

Parts Identification

1 2

3 21 23 4 5

22 20 8 7

9 19

10

11 16 18 17 15 13 12

14

232

Appendix A

Replacement Parts Parts Illustrations Figure A-2 shows the pedestal and rack parts for the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. See the replaceable parts list to identify part numbers.

Figure A-2

Pedestal and Rack Parts

24 25

25

26

27

28 29 30

Appendix A

233

Replacement Parts Customer Self Repair

Customer Self Repair

HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period HP (or HP service providers or service partners) identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are three categories of CSR parts: Yes: Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. Optional: Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for customer self repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, there may or may not be additional charges, depending on the type of warranty service designated for your product. No: Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair. To satisfy the customer warranty, HP requires that an authorized service provider replace the part. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts are shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the telephone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a CSR, HP pays for all the shipping and part return costs and determines the courier to be used. For more information about HP's Customer Self Repair program, contact your local service provider. For the North American program, see the HP Web site at: http://www.hp.com/go/selfrepair

234

Appendix A

Replacement Parts Customer Self Repair

Table A-1 provides CSR information.

Table A-1
Code AY Level Yes

Customer Self Repair Information

Description Level A with instructions available in the service guide Level B with instructions available in the service guide Level C with instructions available in the service guide Not a customer replaceable part. Comments Requires you to replace these parts under warranty. No technical skills required. Low to moderate technical skills required.

BY

Optional

CY

Optional

High technical skills required.

No

Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair. In order to satisfy the customer warranty, HP requires that an authorized service provider replace the part.

Appendix A

235

Replacement Parts Replaceable Parts List

Replaceable Parts List

The items in this list and the corresponding item numbers are the customer self-repair units for HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. The item numbers listed below are used with the part illustrations in order to identify the nomenclature of the part. Part numbers are found by using the part nomenclature from this list to select the correct part from the HP Partsurfer.

NOTE

If you need to replace a system board, first remove the processor modules, DIMMs, and adapter boards, and then transfer these to the new board. Ensure all jumper and switch settings on the old board are transferred to the new board.

NOTE

The replaceable parts list contains parts that do not display in Figure A-1 or Figure A-2.

Refer to Table A-2 when ordering parts for HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers.

Table A-2
Item No.

Replaceable Parts List

Description Part Number Replacement Part Number Exchange Customer Self Repair

PCA Boards (System Components) 22 N/A 23 17 12 13 Power Supply Interface Module SCSI Backplane System Board (A7136-60001); 64MB Cache (CPUs require PDC greater than 44.52) PCI backplane/PCI Riser Display Panel iLO MP Card A7231-04018 A7231-66520 A7136-67001 A7231-66530 A7231-66550 A7231-66580 N/A A7231-69520 A7136-69001 N/A N/A N/A N CY CY CY N CY

Optical Devices 14 14 Memory 2 2 2 2 2 256 MB DDR-SDRAM DIMM (AB542A)) 512 MB DDR-SDRAM DIMM (A9773A)) 1 GB DDR-SDRAM (rp3440 (A9774A)) 2 GB DDR-SDRAM (rp3440) (A9775A) 4 GB DDR-SDRAM, (rp3440) (AB561A) (there is an 8-slot restriction for this DIMM) A6967-67001 A6968AX A6969AX A6970AX AB475AX N/A N/A A6969-69001 A6835-69001 AB475-69001 AY AY AY AY AY DVD Drive, Slimline (A9919A) CD-RW/DVD Combo Drive, Slimline (A9920A) A7231-62012 A7231-62024 A7231-69012 A7231-69014 N N

236

Appendix A

Replacement Parts Replaceable Parts List

Table A-2
Item No.

Replaceable Parts List (Continued)

Description Part Number Replacement Part Number Exchange Customer Self Repair

Internal Disks/Removable Media (Hard Disk Drives) 15 15 15 15 15 Fans 6 7 8 N/A Assembly, Super 80 mm Fan (Fan 1a/1b) Assembly, Thin 80 mm Fan (Fan 2) Assembly, Dual fan (Fan 3) Assembly, Standard 80 mm Fan A7231-04014 A7231-04015 A7231-04033 A7231-04017 N/A N/A N/A N/A AY AY N N 36 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Disk Drive (A9796A) 73 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Disk Drive (A9897A) 146 GB, 10K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Disk Drive (A9898A) 146 GB, 15K RPM Ultra320 SCSI Disk Drive (AB581A) 300 GB, 10K Ultra320 SCSI LP Disk Drive (AD049A) A9896-64001 A9897-64001 A9898-64001 AB461-64001 0950-4532E0 A9896-69001 A9897-69001 A9898-69001 AB461-69001 A7384-69001 BN BN BN BN BN

Processors 5 5 Dual 800 MHz PA-RISC CPU with 32 MB L2 Cache (A7138-62002) (A7138A) Dual 800 MHz PA-RISC CPU with 64 MB L2 Cache (A9952A, A9954A) (AB534A) (Requires PDC greater than 44.52) Dual 1 GHz PA-RISC CPU with 32 MB L2 Cache (AB354-62001) (AB354A) Dual 1 GHz PA-RISC CPU with 64 MB L2 Cache (A9953A) (AB535A) (Requires PDC greater than 44.52) Processor Tool Kit A7138-67002 AB534-62001 A7138-69002 AB534-69001 BY BY

5 5 N/A

AB254-67001 AB535-62001 5069-5441

AB354-69001 AB535-69001 N/A

BY BY N

Power Supply 10 4 Battery N/A N/A System Battery (BR2330) iLO MP Card Battery (BR2032) 1420-0386 N/A N/A N/A Power Supply, 650 Watts, Redundant (A6874A) Assembly, Power Pod A6874-63000 0950-4294 A6874-69000 N/A N CY

Pedestal and Rack Solution Kits 27 26 Deskside Pedestal Assembly, Deskside Front Panel A7231-04028 A7231-04054 N/A N/A N N/A

Appendix A

237

Replacement Parts Replaceable Parts List

Table A-2
Item No. 24 25 N/A N/A

Replaceable Parts List (Continued)

Description Part Number Replacement A7231-40052 A7231-04051 5064-9670 5065-5963 Part Number Exchange N/A N/A N/A N/A Customer Self Repair N/A AY N/A N/A

Deskside Top Panel Assembly, Deskside Side Panel Field Rack Kit, Slide Mid Weight (AB241A) Field Rack Kit, Cable Management Arm (AB241A)

Rack Server 28 29 30 Server, AssemblyRack Latch Right Server, AssemblyRack Bezel Right Server, AssemblyRack Left Bezel with Rack Latch A7231-04023 A7231-04053 A7231-04068 N/A N/A N/A N N AY

Plastic and Metal Parts N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 16, 18 3 N/A N/A 1 N/A Cables N/A 11 N/A 20 21 N/A N/A N/A IDE Cable Status Panel Cable Disk Power Cable, SCSI, Channel A Cable, SCSI, Channel B Cable, Super 80 mm Fan Cable, 80 mm Fan Single-Channel Internal SCSI Cable A7231-63002 A7231-63003 A7231-63004 A7231-63017 A7231-63018 A7231-63005 A7231-63006 A7231-63024 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A AY AY AY AY AY AY AY AY Filler, Slimline Carbon Filler, Slimline Gray HDD Filler, Carbon HDD Filler, Gray Assembly, Fan Cage Assembly, PCI Card Cage Assembly, Plastic Turbocooler Duct ECI Cover Plate Screw, M3x0.5x6mm Long with Torx-T15 Recess Assembly, Top Cover Assembly, Memory Air Flow Guide A7231-40027 A7231-40026 A6198-60003 A6198-60002 A7231-04004 A7231-04006 A7231-04034 A7231-00072 0515-2721 A7231-04003 A7231-04049 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A AY AY AY AY BY BY AY AY AY AY AY

238

Appendix A

Replacement Parts Replaceable Parts List

Table A-2
Item No. N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Replaceable Parts List (Continued)

Description Part Number Replacement A7231-63025 A6144-63001 A7231-63008 8121-0808 5183-9500 8120-1378 8120-1689 8120-8376 8120-4753 8120-2104 8120-1351 A6828-60101 A6829-60101 N/A A5838-60101 A6826-60001 A5506-60102 A6847-67101 A6825-67101 N/A A5513-60001 N/A A5783-60101 Part Number Exchange N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A6828-69001 A6829-69001 A6795-69001 A5838-69101 A6826-69001 A5506-69102 none none N/A A5513-69002 A3739-69002 A5783-69101 Customer Self Repair AY AY BY AY AY AY AY AY AY AY AY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY

Dual-Channel Internal SCSI Cables (2) iLO MP Card M Cable Flex Cable for the iLO MP Card Audio Cable Headphone Power Cord U.S. Canada 125 VAC Power Cord Cont. Europe 250 VAC Chinese power cord, straight Power Cord Japan 125 VAC Power Cord Switzerland 250 VAC Power Cord U.K. 250 VAC Single-Channel Ultra 160 SCSI Adapter(A6828A) PCI 4X 2-Channel Ultra 160 SCSI Adapter (A6829A) Fibre Channel Card, 2 Gb, Single-Port (A6795A) PCI 2-Port 100 Base-T Ultra 2 SCSI (A5838A) PCI -X Dual-Channel 2 Gb Fibre Channel HBA (A6826A) PCI LAN Adapter, 4-Port 100 Base-TX (A5506B) LAN Adapter, 1000 SX Gigabit, Next Gen (A6847A LAN Adapter, 1000 TX Gigabit, Next Gen (A6825A) Single-Port 100 Base TX LAN Adapter (RJ-45, Half Length) (A5230A) PCI ATM 155 MB ps MMF Adapter (A5513A) FDDI Dual Attach Station LAN Adapter (A3739B) PCI Token Ring 4/16/100 Hardware Adapter (A5783A)

Appendix A

239

Replacement Parts Replaceable Parts List

240

Appendix A

B Utilities
This appendix describes the boot console handler (BCH) utility that is part of the server. High-level information is also provided on iLO MP. For complete information on iLO MP, see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 iLO MP Operations Guide on the Web. This appendix addresses the following topics: Boot Console Handler on page 241 iLO MP on page 247

Boot Console Handler

The BCH user interface provides the interface between you and the firmware through the menus and simple commands. The BCH is separate code in processor-dependent code (PDC). The BCH code has two purposes: Enables the bootstrap code to know which path to boot from. Enables you to interact with PDC to view and modify a set of specific system parameters.

Booting is standard for PA RISC, but can be transparent depending on the state of the autoflags (boot, search, and start). If the autoflags are clear and you override autobooting, a boot sequence ends in the interactive portion of BCH where modification and viewing of some system parameters is possible.

NOTE

When the autostart flag is off, autoboots are interrupted if a configuration change occurs, which causes reduced performance. Therefore, you must intervene before booting to the internal system loader (ISL). The auto boot halts at the BCH prompt. Continue booting by entering boot.

BCH Commands
The PDC user interface provides the following types of commands: User Commands Service Commands Relate to common system management or administration tasks such as configuration or boot. Available to qualified service personnel. The service commands are generally used to access information about faults that occur while the system is running.

Appendix B

241

Utilities Boot Console Handler

Table B-1 shows the BCH Main Menu, submenus and commands. Examples are provided in BCH Main Menu Commands and Submenus on page 242.

Table B-1

BCH Main Menu, Submenus, and Commands

Submenu Description Boots from the specified path. Displays or modify a path. Search for boot devices.

BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] PAth [PRI|ALT] [<path>] SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>]

COnfiguration menu INformation menu SERvice menu

Displays or sets boot values. Displays hardware information. Displays service commands.

DIsplay HElp [<menu>|<command> RESET

Redisplays the current menu. Displays help for menu or command. Restarts the system.

The boot device paths specify the primary boot device (PRI boot path), the high-availability alternate device (HAA boot path), and the alternate device (ALT boot path). Table B-2 lists the boot paths.

Table B-2

Boot Paths
Boot Source Boot Path 0/1/1/0.0.0 (Simplex Mode) 0/1/1/1.0.0 (Duplex Mode) 0/1/1/0.1.0 (Duplex Mode) 0/0/3/0.0

Bottom Disk Slot 1 (SCSI ID = 0) Top Disk Slot 2 (SCSI ID = 1) DVD BCH Main Menu Commands and Submenus

The following sections provide information and examples of the submenus and commands in the BCH firmware user interface. The BCH Main Menu is the first menu displayed when you enter the firmware user interface. The other menus available are listed in this menu. Enter DI (display) to view the commands available from this menu. Access other menus by entering the name of the menu at the command prompt. From a given menu, you can run a command from any other menu by entering the menu name that is associated with the command, followed by the command. For example, to run the TI (time) command (in the COnfiguration menu) from the Main Menu, enter co ti. To see all available commands listed under their respective menus, enter HE (help) MA (main).

242

Appendix B

Utilities Boot Console Handler

Example screen output of the BCH Main Menu:

---- Main Menu --------------------------------------------------------------Command ------BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] * PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] COnfiguration menu INformation menu SERvice menu DIsplay HElp [<menu>|<command>] RESET ---Main Menu: Enter command or menu > Description ----------Boot from specified path Display or modify a path Search for boot devices Displays or sets boot values Displays hardware information Displays service commands Redisplay the current menu Display help for menu or command Restart the system

* You cannot modify the keyboard path. Boot Command Use the BO (boot) command to initiate the boot sequence from any menu in the interface. You can enter either a default or specified path to the boot device. This path must be the definition of a device, for example, FWSCSI.6.0 or PRI. The default is PRI. Path Command The PA (path) command displays or sets the current paths. Invoked with only one argument, PA displays the current path of the entity passed as argument. For example, path alt displays the current alternative boot path, and path pri fwscsi.6.0 sets up the primary boot path as the device attached to SCSI controller with ID 6 and LUN 0. You can also set and display the paths of console (graphics/serial) and keyboard. For example:
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > pa Primary boot path: intscsia.1 0/1/1/0.1 0/01/01/0.1

(hex)

Alternate boot path:

intscsib.2 0/1/1/0.2 0/01/01/01.2

(hex)

Console path:

0/7/1/1.0 0/07/01/01.1

(hex)

Keyboard path:

0/0/4/0.0 0/0/04/0.0

(hex)

Main Menu: Enter command or manu >

Appendix B

243

Utilities Boot Console Handler Search Command The SEA (search) command automatically checks all possible boot and install devices connected to the system and displays these bootable paths. In several firmware versions, it links these paths to a shortcut (such as P0). It can also search the LAN, if the system can boot it. Some firmware revisions enable you to restrain the search path, for example SEA lan or SEA disk. The SEA command is available in the Main and COnfiguration menus.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > sea Searching for potential boot device(s) This may take several minutes. To discontinue search, press any key (termination may not be immediate).

Path# ----P0 P1 P2 P3

Device Path (dec) ----------------0/0/2/0.0 0/1/1/0.1 0/1/1/0.0 0/1/1/1.2

Device Path (mnem) -----------------ide.0 intscsia.1 intscsia.0 intscsib.2

Device Type ----------Random access media Random access media Random access media Random access media

IODC Rev ---1 1 1 1

Configuration Menu The COnfiguration Menu commands enable you to view and modify the configuration and state of the system.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > co ---- Configuration Menu -----------------------------------------------------Command ------AUto [BOot|SEArch|STart] [ON|OFF] BootID [<proc>] [<bootid>] BootINfo BootTimer [0 - 200] CPUconfig [<proc>] [ON|OFF] DEfault FastBoot [ON|OFF] ResTart [ON|OFF] PAth [PRI|ALT] [<path>] SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s]] BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] DIsplay HElp [<command>] RESET MAin ---Configuration Menu: Enter command > Description ----------Display or set specified flag Display or set Boot Identifier Display boot-related information Seconds allowed for boot attempt Config/Deconfig processor Set the system to predefined values Display or set boot tests execution Display or set boot tests execution Display or modify a path Search for boot devices Read or set the real time clock in GMT Boot from specified path Redisplay the current menu Display help for specified command Restart the system Return to Main Menu

244

Appendix B

Utilities Boot Console Handler

The configuration default command sets the following values:

Primary boot path: 0/0/1/0.0 0/0/2/0 0/0/1/0.0 0/0/4/0.0 ON ON OFF 0

Alternate boot path: Console path: Keyboard path: Autoboot: Autosearch: Autostart: BootTimer

Information Menu The INformation menu commands enable you to view information about the configuration and state of the system.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > in ---- Information Menu -------------------------------------------------------Command ------ALL BootINfo CAche ChipRevisions COprocessor FwrVersion IO LanAddress MEmory PRocessor WArnings IORevisions BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] DIsplay HElp [<command>] RESET MAin ---Information Menu: Enter command > Description ----------Display all system information Display boot-related information Display cache information Display revisions of major VLSI Display coprocessor information Display firmware version Display I/O interface information Display Core LAN station address Display memory information Display processor information Display selftest warning messages Display selftest warning messages Boot from specified path Redisplay the current menu Display help for specified command Restart the system Return to Main Menu

** *** ***

* The PCI device information displayed includes description, path, vendor ID, device ID, slot number, and bus number. ** The PRocessor command displays the system model string. ***Warnings displayed are as follows: WARNING: Too many CPUS for a rp3410 system. System will not boot. WARNING: A fatal error has occurred-system cannot boot. Review warning messages in the information menu.

Appendix B

245

Utilities Boot Console Handler Service Menu The SERvice menu commands are used by service personnel to view information about the system for the purpose of system service operations.
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > ser ---- Service Menu -----------------------------------------------------------Command ------CLEARPIM SCSI [option] [<path>] [<val>] MemRead <address> [<len>] PDT [CLEAR] PIM [<proc>] [HPMC|LPMC|TOC] ProductNum <O|C> [<number>] ScRoll [ON|OFF] SELftests [ON|OFF] BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] DIsplay HElp [<command>] RESET MAin ---Service Menu: Enter command > Description ----------Clear (zero) the contents of PIM Display or set SCSI controller values Read memory and I/O locations Display or clear the PDT Display PIM information Display or set Product Number Display or change scrolling ability Enable/disable self test execution Boot from specified path Redisplay the current menu Display help for specified command Restart the system Return to Main Menu

Display Command The DI (display) command redisplays the current menu. SCSI Command The SCSI command displays and sets the SCSI controller parameters, such as initiator ID and speed. The OS device drivers use these parameters to program the controller.

NOTE

These values are only suggested by the device driver; the actual values programmed into the controller can be different.

ProductNum Command The ProductNum command configures the original or current product number. The software ID (SWID) does not get updated automatically when the original product number changes, but you can manually update the SWID by resetting the system with the reset command.

246

Appendix B

Utilities iLO MP

iLO MP
The Integrated Lights-Out Management Processor (iLO MP) for entry-level PA-RISC is an autonomous management subsystem embedded directly on the server. It is the foundation of server High Availability (HA), embedded server, and fault management. It also provides system administrators secure remote management capabilities regardless of server status or location. The iLO MP is available whenever the system is connected to a power source, even if the server main power button is in the off position. Remote access is the key to maximizing efficiency of administration and troubleshooting for enterprise servers. Integrity servers have been designed so all administrative functions that can be performed locally on the machine can also be performed remotely. iLO enables remote access to the operating system console, control over the server power and hardware reset functionality, and works with the server to enable remote network booting through a variety of methods. HP has used several different names to describe the management functionality embedded in their servers, including the management processor. In addition, HP uses the term management processor to refer to any embedded microprocessor that manages a system. Management processor is a descriptive term (such as server), and iLO is a brand name, or label (such as Integrity). For complete information on the iLO MP, see the HP Integrity and HP 9000 Integrated Lights-Out Management Processor Operations Guide.

Appendix B

247

Utilities iLO MP

248

Appendix B

C Physical and Environmental Specifications

Table C-1 provides temperature and airflow information for minimum, typical, and maximum configurations for the HP 9000 rp3410 and rp3440 servers. It also lists the server and rack weights and dimensions.

Table C-1

Physical and Environmental Specifications

Condition Typical Heat Release 100-250 VAC Weight Airflow, Nominal Airflow, at Maximum Ambient degrees Ca Server Alone Rack Pedestal Overall Server (W x D x H)

Rack

Pedestal

Min. Config. Max. Config. Typical Config.

341 Watts 57.8 CFM 98.3 m3/hr 68.2 CFM 115.94 m3/hr 38.6 lbs (17.5 kg) 49.0 lbs (22.2 kg) 56.3 lbs (25.5 kg) W: 19.0 in (48.3 cm) D: 26.8 in (67.9 cm) H: 3.4 in (8.6 cm) W: 11.6 in (29.5 cm) D: 26.6 in (67.5 cm) H: 19.5 in (49.4 cm)

536 Watts

426 Watts

ASHRAE Class 1

Airflow cooling scheme (front to rear)

Min./ Config. Max. Config.

One dual-core CPU, one power supply, 2 GB DIMM, zero DVD, three HDDs. Two dual-core CPUs, one power supply, 32 GB DIMM, one DVD, three HDDs, one graphics card, one SCSI card. One dual-core CPU, one power supply, 6 GB DIMM, one DVD, three HDDs, one graphics card, one SCSI card.

Typical Config.

a.

Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree per 300 meters above 900 meters.

Appendix C

249

Physical and Environmental Specifications

250

Appendix C

Index
A A6150 graphics card, installing, 118 acoustic noise specification, 53 airflow guides, remove and replace, 78, 170 altitude, 52 antistatic wrist strap, 148 ARP Ping, 110 B backplane PCI, remove and replace, 205 SCSI, remove and replace, 227 baseboard management controller (BMC), 30 battery iLO MP card, remove and replace, 211 system, remove and replace, 198 BCH commands boot paths, 242 display, 246 information menu, 245 main menu, 242 productnum, 246 SCSI, 246 service menu, 246 bezel pedestal-mount, remove and replace, 71 rack-mount, remove and replace, 66 BMC, 30 boot console handler See BCH, 241 booting HP-UX, 121, 132 LVM maintenance mode, 133 single-user mode, 122, 133 C circuit breaker, 50 cleaning the server, 145 CM command, 45, 46, 120 command mode, 45, 120 commands BCH, 241 BCH commands configuration menu, 244 information menu, 245 main menu, 242 service menu, 246 ODE, 140 console accessing host with TUI, 116 accessing host with Web GUI, 116 determining connection method, 109 graphics, accessing using VGA, 118 setup, 107 troubleshooting, 126 contacting HP, 130 control panel LEDs, 141 controller baseboard management, 30 processor dependent hardware, 30 SCSI, 31 controls CD/DVD, 37 control panel, 35 disk drive, 37 cooling bulk power supply, 53 CPU/Memory, 52 PCI/mass storage section, 53 core I/O connections, 105 external, 23 internal, 23 covers side, pedestal-mount, remove, 67, 156, 159 top, pedestal-mount, remove and replace, 68 top, rack-mount, remove and replace, 64, 152 CSR (customer self repair), 234 customer self repair (CSR), 234 D damaged equipment, returning, 62 deallocated memory rank, 180 DHCP security risk, 115 DHCP and DNS configure iLO MP LAN, 110 iLO MP LAN configuration, 110 dimensions and values, 48, 59 DIMM, memory installing, 181 supported, 177 disk and I/O path logging extended core I/O, 32 internal disk and DVD, 32 PCI I/O, 33 disk drive hot-pluggable, controls and LEDs, 37 installing, 73 internal, remove and replace, 166 LEDs, 37 troubleshooting, 126 DNS name, 110 DVD drive controls and indicators, 37 install, 78 remove and replace, 208 troubleshooting, 126 E electrical specifications, 49 emulation device, configuring, 112 environmental specifications, 51 temperature sensor, 52 Ethernet card LAN LEDs, 40 event ID, 59 event IDs, 24 event monitoring service (EMS), 137 external core, features I/O, 23

251

Index
F fans system, remove and replace, 161 features external core I/O, 23 firmware, 24 internal core I/O, 23 memory, 22 PCI riser, 23 power supply unit, 23 processor, 22 system board manageability, 23 FGPA, 30 field programmable gate array, 30 firmware downloading and installing, 127 features, 24 information, 59 supported operating system, 59 system requirements, 87 front bezel pedestal configuration, 156 rack configuration, 63, 151 front panel control panel, 35 disk drive LEDs, 37 DVD drive, 37 LEDs and switches, 36 G gate array, field programmable, 30 grounding, 49 H hard disk drive See disk drive hot-pluggable disk drives installation, 73 hot-swappable fans, 161 power supply, 163 HP-UX BCH, 132 booting, 132 LVM maintenance mode, 133 shutting down, 133 single-user mode, 133 humidity, 51 I I/O and memory controller, 27 bus interface, 29 core, 105 external core, 23 internal core, 23 IDE interface, 31 iLO MP card battery, remove and replace, 211 card, LAN LEDs, 43 card, remove and replace, 209 configuring LAN, ARP Ping, 110 configuring LAN, DHCP and DNS, 110 configuring LAN, RS-232 serial port, 112 LAN configuration method, 109 LEDs, 43 logging in, 114 main menu, 114 PC command, 45, 119, 120 physical access method, 109 system event logs (SEL), 138 troubleshooting, 138 installation checklist, 60 installing the A6150 graphics card, 118 installing the system, 56 integrated lights-out management processor See iLO MP intermittent server problems, 126 internal components, location, 149 internal core I/O, features, 23 internal RAID, 24 IP address how iLO MP acquires, 109 K keystone system temperature and humidity specifications, 52 L LAN LEDs, 142 LAN, system, 31 LED status panel, replacing, 213 LEDs control panel, 141 diagnostic, 141 disk drive, 37 DVD, 38 Ethernet LAN, 40 front control panel, 36 iLO MP, 43 iLO MP card LAN, 143 LAN, 40 locator, 37, 38 rear panel, 38 status panel, remove and replace, 213 system board, 144 troubleshooting, 141 logging in to the iLO MP, 114 M management processor See iLO MP media drive, remove and replace, 207 memory architecture, 28 array capacities, 29 array chip spare, 29 block diagram, 28 DIMMs, 22, 28 features, 22

252

Index
installing additional, 84 installing DIMMS, 181 reallocate, 180 removing DIMMS, 180 replace deallocated memory rank, 180 supported DIMMS, 177 system memory, 177 system, installing, 84 MP See iLO MP N noise emission specifications, 53 nonoperating environment, 52 O Offline Diagnostic Environment (ODE), 140 commands, 140 operating environment, 52 operating system supported, 121, 131 verifying server configuration, 123, 134 will boot or will not boot, 125 OS See operating system P parts list, 236 path (BCH), 241 PC command, 45, 119, 120 PCI backplane, remove and replace, 205 riser, 23 PCI card cage, remove and replace, 88 PCI cards installing, 90 remove and replace, 202 PDH (processor dependent hardware) controller, 30 pedestal convert from rack mount, 104 mount, 67 physical and environmental specifications, 54, 249 PIC card cage, remove and replace, 200 pinouts connector 10/100/1000 base-t Ethernet LAN, 40 iLO MP card LAN, 44 SCSI port, 41 USB port, 40 power, 50 and cooling, 51 button, 36, 124, 136 full state, 119 off state, 119 PR command, 45, 119 problems, 125 reset command See PR standby state, 119 states, 44, 119 power supply hot-swappable, remove, 164 hot-swappable, replace, 165 installing, 92 interface module, remove, 223 interface module, replace, 226 unit, 23 powering off the server, 4546, 120121 manually, 46, 120 using the iLO MP PC command, 45, 120 powering on the server, 45, 119120 manually, 45, 120 using the iLO MP PC command, 45, 119 PR command, 45, 119 processor airflow guide, remove and replace, 172 processor dependent hardware controller, 30 processor module features, 22 installing, 93 remove and replace, 183 R RAID, 24 rear panel 10/100/1000 base-t Ethernet LAN, 39 connectors and switches, 39 dual USB port, 40 iLO MP card LAN LEDs, 43 SCSI port, 41 view, 38 remove and replace airflow guides, 170 battery, iLO MP card, 211 covers and bezels, 151 DIMMs, 177 disk drive SCSI backplane, 227 disk drive, hot-pluggable, 166 dual processor module, 183 extend server form rack, 63 extend server from rack, 151 fans, hot-swappable, 161 front bezel, 160 iLO MP card, 209 iLO MP card battery, 211 LED status panel, 213 media drive, 207 memory, 177 memory airflow guide, 79 PCI backplane, 205 PCI card cage, 88, 200 PIC cards, 202 power supply interface module, 223 power supply, hot-swappable, 163 processor airflow guide, 80 processor module, 183 removable media (CD-DVD), 77, 207 resident system board with replacement system board, 221 SCSI backplane, 227 service tools required, 148 system battery, 102, 198 system board, 214

253

Index
system fans, 161 replaceable parts list, 236 returning damaged equipment, 62 S safety information, 59, 147 SCSI backplane, remove and replace, 227 connector pinout, 41 controller, 31 security access settings, 115 risk with DHCP enabled, 115 setting up, 115 server description and features, 58 introduction, 55 overview, 19 views, 56 setup checklist, 107 flowchart, 108 shut down HP-UX, 122, 133 site preparation, verifying, 61 static IP address assigning with ARP Ping, 110 assigning with LC command, 112 support tools manager (STM), 137 system configuration, 47 power specifications, 49 specs, 47 system board block diagram, 26 components, 26 LEDs, 144 manageability, 23 remove and replace, 214 replace resident with replacement, 221 system event log (SEL), 138 system memory installing, 84 remove and replace, 177 T temperature, 51 temperature and humidity specifications, 52 toe-tag, 110 tools required, 148 troubleshooting console, 127 DVD, 126 hard drive, 126 hardware, 141 iLO MP, 138 intermittent server problems, 126 LAN LEDs, 142 methodology, 124, 135 operating system, 125, 136 power and system LEDs, 141 system board LEDs, 144 system event logs (SEL), 138 system power, 136 using LEDs, 127, 141 using offline support tools, 140 Offline Diagnostic Environment ODE), 140 using online support tools, 137 event monitoring service (EMS), 137 support tools manager (STM), 137 using power button, 124, 136 U universal serial bus (USB), 40 unloading the server, 62 unpacking, inspecting for damage, 61 utilities boot console handler (BCH), 241 iLO MP, 247 V validate server configuration, 123, 134 verify server configuration using BCH, 134 site prep, 61 VGA graphics console, accessing, 118 W Web GUI, 116 interacting with iLO MP, 116 login page, 116

254